Table of Contents Pdf

Home

1. Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field Note Only available when creating new table s Delete Field Delete the selected field Move Up Move Move the selected field up down Down Note Only available when creating new table 104 To add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields you can right click and select the Duplicate Field from the pop up menu Use the Name edit box to set the field name Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names in the table The Type drop down list defines the type of the field data See PostgreSQL Data Types for details Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Decimals edit box to define the number of digits after the decimal point the scale for Floating Point data type Note Be careful when shortening the field length as losing data might be caused Not null Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field Field s Properties Note The following options depend on the field type you are chosen Options Options to be associated with the foreign table column The allowed option Name and Value are specific to each foreign data wrapper and are validated using the foreign data wrapper s validator function Default Set the default value for the field Comment Set any optional text describing the current field Collation Set the collation of the column which must be of a col
2. Cache To specify how many values of the sequence the database preallocates and keeps in memory for faster access The minimum value for this parameter is 2 No Cache This option indicates that values of the sequence are not preallocated Cycled This option allows the sequence continues to generate values after reaching either its maximum or minimum value After an ascending sequence reaches its maximum value it generates its minimum value After a descending sequence reaches its minimum it generates its maximum value Order This option guarantees that sequence numbers are generated in order of request Oracle Synonyms Synonym is an alias for any table view materialized view synonym procedure function package type Java class schema object user defined object type or another synonym Because a synonym Is simply an alias it requires no storage other than its definition in the data dictionary Click ain gt Synonym to open an object list for Synonym General Properties Object Database Link A complete or partial database link to create a synonym for a schema object on a remote database where the object is located Object Schema The schema in which the object resides Object Type The object type Object The object for which the synonym is created 81 Oracle Triggers Triggers are similar to procedures A trigger stored in the database can include SQL and PL SQL or Java statements to run as a un
3. Referenced Cardinality The foreign key cardinality of referenced parent table Referencing Cardinality The foreign key cardinality of referencing child table Schema Name The schema names of the table view Show Name Check this box to show the name of the foreign key or shape Show Schema Name Check this box to show the schema names of the tables views in the diagram Show View Relationships Check this box to show the relationship line of the view Table Font Name The font name of the tables Table Font Size The font size of the tables Top The number of pixels from the object to the top of the canvas Visible Check this box to show the foreign key lines Width The width of the object Width pages The width of the diagram number of papers 211 Model Overview Pane The Overview pane displays the whole active diagram in the canvas To zoom in or zoom out the selected area of the diagram adjust the slider If the Overview pane is hidden choose View gt Show Properties and Show Overview from the model s menu Same effect can be achieved with keyboard shortcuts Zoom In CTRL or OC TRL Mousewheel Up Zoom out CTRL or CT RL Mousewheel Down Diagram Canvas Diagram Canvas consists of a canvas and a toolbar for you to design the diagram such as adding objects formatting diagrams and printing models etc A model file can have more than one diagram Each diagram is re
4. Refresh Click to refresh the ER Diagram Regenerate ER Diagram Choose Regenerate ER Diagram from Refresh button It regenerates the ER Diagram with using auto layout feature F Move Diagram Click to switch to hand mode Press and hold the SPACE key then move the diagram New Relation Click to create a relation between two table fields a Color Set color to selected tables and relations Paper Size Select paper size from drop down list corresponding paper size will reflect in the Overview pane Object Information In the Object List pane you can also view information of a selected object Select View gt Show Object Information from the main menu or right click the object and select Object Information from the pop up menu Note The tabs depend on the object type you have chosen General Show the object information DDL Show the DDL statement of the object Using Show the objects that the current object used Used by Show the current object used by whom Objects Show the objects in the tablespace 289 Preview Show the sql statement in the query Member of Show the roles that the user or the role assigned to Members Show the members of the role Server Monitor Available only in Full Version Navicat provides Server Monitor to view properties of selected server s Select Tools gt i Server Monitor and select the preferred server type from the main menu Not
5. Right Justify Right justify the text in the component Justify Justify the text in the component A Font Color Set the font color Highlight Color Set the background color of the textual component wl Anchors Specify how a report component is anchored to its parent Use Anchors to ensure that a report element maintains its current position relative to an edge of its parent control i e Band Region even if the parent is resized 263 Border Specify which of the outside border lines of a report component are rendered J Bring Forward Bring the component one step forward ay Bring to Front Bring the component to the front The components in the front print last and the components in the back print first Use the Report Tree to see the exact layering of components within the band E Send Backward Send the component one step backward Ta Send to Back Send the component to the back The components in the front print last and the components in the back print first Use the Report Tree to see the exact layering of components within the band Report Dialogs The Print dialog is automatically displayed when the report is sent to the printer allowing you to select the pages number of copies and printer for the report When the AllowPrintToFile or AllowPrintToArchive properties of the Report are enabled this dialog displays additional print to file options To open this dialog select the File gt Print me
6. SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the size of the tables required RTRIM The same as binary except that trailing space characters are ignored Note Support in SQLite 3 Sort Order To indicate sort order ascending ASC or descending DESC SQLite Table Foreign Keys A foreign key is a field in a relational table that matches the primary key column of another table In the Foreign Keys tab just simply click a foreign key field for editing By using the foreign key toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected foreign key field Button Description amp Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table amp Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key Use the Referenced Table drop down list to select a foreign table To include field s referenced field s to the key just simply double click the Fields Referenced Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing The On Delete and On Update drop down list define the type of the actions to be taken RESTRICT The RESTRICT action means that the application is prohibited from deleting for ON DELETE RESTRICT or modifying for ON UPDATE RESTRICT a parent key when there exists one or more child keys mapped to it NO ACTION Configuring NO ACTION means just that when a parent key is modified or deleted from the database no special action Is taken
7. Setting Additional Options Step 4 TXT XML Excel HTML The following options depend on the file format chose in step 1 Field Name Row Field name row indicates which row should Navicat recognize as Column Title First Data Row First data row indicates which row should Navicat start reading the actual data Last Data Row Last data row indicates which row should Navicat stop reading the actual data Note If no column title are defined for the file enter 1 for First data row and 0 for Field name row Date Order Date Delimiter Time Delimiter DateTime Order Define the formats of date and time 230 Decimal Symbol Define the format of decimal number Binary Data Encoding Set binary data is imported as Base64 encoded or None encoding from file Setting Target Table Step 5 You are allowed to define a new table name or choose to import into an existing table from the drop down list Note If you type a new table name in Target Table the box in New Table will be checked automatically Source Table Ta rget Table New Table I parts part v M For importing multiple tables all tables will be shown in the list Source lable arget lable ew lable P Source Tabl Target Tabl New Tabl gt parts parts E plbiolife plbiolife o Adjusting Field Structures and Mapping Fields Step 6 Navicat will make assumption on the field types and length in the source table You are allowed to choose desired
8. Use extended insert statements Insert records using extended insert syntax Example INSERT INTO users VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 2 Johnson Ryne 56 0 Katherine 23 Run multiple queries in each execution Check this option if you want to run multiple queries in each execution which will make the restore process faster Create tables Create tables during the restore process with this option is on Create records Restore table records with this option is on Otherwise only table structures will be restored Create indexes Create indexes for the restored table with this option is on Create triggers Create triggers for the restored table with this option is on Overwrite existing tables Overwrite if tables already exist in the database schema Overwrite existing views Overwrite if views already exist in the database schema 247 Overwrite existing functions Overwrite if functions already exist in the database schema Overwrite existing events Overwrite if events already exist in the database schema Overwrite existing sequences Overwrite if sequences already exist in the database schema Overwrite existing indexes Overwrite if indexes already exist in the database schema Overwrite existing triggers Overwrite if triggers already exist in the database schema Insert Auto Increment Values Insert auto increment values in the database schema
9. Columns Use the Schema Table and or Name drop down lists to select the schema table and or field name and Order drop down list to define the order of the index ASC or DESC Bitmap Join Use the InnerSchema InnerTable InnerField OuterSchema OuterTable and OuterField drop down lists to select joined schemas tables and fields respectively General Properties for Domain Index Table schema The schema that contains the index Table name The table name Column The column which the index is based Schema The schema of the indextype Type Select the created or built in indextypes Parameters Information about the path table and about the secondary indexes corresponding to the components of XMLIndex General Properties for Cluster Index Table schema The schema that contains the index Cluster name The name of the cluster Advanced Properties Unusable An unusable index must be rebuilt or dropped and re created before it can be used 13 Tablespace The name of the tablespace to hold the index Compress To enable key compression which eliminates repeated occurrence of key column values and may substantially reduce storage Note No compression for Bitmap Indexes Parallel The creation of the index will be parallelized Reverse To store the bytes of the index block in reverse order excluding the rowid Logging Choose Logging to log the creation of the index in the redo log
10. Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Rules Use the Name edit box to set the rule name Event The event is one of SELECT INSERT UPDATE or DELETE Do instead This indicates that the commands should be executed instead of the original command Otherwise the commands should be executed in addition to the original command Condition Any SQL conditional expression returning boolean The condition expression may not refer to any tables except NEW and OLD and may not contain aggregate functions Definition The command or commands that make up the rule action Valid commands are SELECT INSERT UPDATE DELETE or NOTIFY Within condition and command the special table names NEW and OLD may be used to refer to values in the referenced table NEW is valid in ON INSERT and ON UPDATE rules to refer to the new row being inserted or updated OLD is valid in ON UPDATE and ON DELETE rules to refer to the existing row being updated or deleted Comment Define the comment for the rule Advanced Properties Owner The owner of the view View Viewer View Viewer displays the view data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details 109 PostgreSQL Functions PostgreSQL provides four kinds of functions e query language functions functions written in SQL e procedural language functions func
11. Move Up Move Down Move the selected field up down Note Only available when creating a new table Use the Name edit box to set the field name Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names in the table The Type drop down list defines the type of the field data See Oracle Built in Datatypes for details Use the Length edit box to define the precision total number of digits of the field and use Scale edit box to define the scale number of digits to the right of the decimal point for numeric column 59 Note Be careful when shortening the field length as it might result in data loss Not null Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field P Primary Key A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record None of the fields that are part of the primary key can contain a null value Field s Pop up Options Duplicate Field Add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields Primary Key Name Enter the primary key constraint name Field s Properties Note The following options depend on the field type you are chosen Default Set the default value for the field Comment Set any optional text describing the current field Leading Field Precision Set the number of digits in the leading field Fractional Seconds Precision Set the number of digits in the fractional part of the SECOND datetime field Year Precisi
12. Schema of source type and Source type The schema and name of the source data type of the cast Schema of target type and Target type The schema and name of the target data type of the cast Schema of function and Function The function used to perform the cast The function name may be schema qualified If it is not the function will be looked up in the schema search path The function s result data tyoe must match the target type of the cast If no function is specify indicates that the source type and the target type are binary compatible so no function is required to perform the cast Implicit Indicate that the cast may be invoked implicitly in any context Assignment Indicate that the cast can be invoked implicitly in assignment contexts 129 PostgreSQL Foreign Servers A foreign server typically encapsulates connection information that a foreign data wrapper uses to access an external data resource Additional user specific connection information may be specified by means of user mappings Click d gt Foreign Server to open an object list for Foreign Server Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 4 or later To install the postgres fdw extension for accessing data stored in external PostgreSQL servers you can right click anywhere the Object List pane and select Install postgres _fdw Extension General Properties FDW Name The name of the foreign data wrapper that manages the server Options Define the con
13. Select the Oracle Database built in datatype or user defined type of the attribute Data Type Parameter Determine the corresponding data type parameters Oracle XML Schemas XML Schema is a schema definition language written in XML It can be used to describe the structure and various other semantics of conforming instance documents Click as gt XML Schema to open an object list for XML Schema Schema Doc Enter a valid XML schema document under the Schema Doc tab Advanced Properties Local Check this to register as local schemas Force on schema registration Check this to ignore errors generated during schema evolution Object Types Check this to enable the schema compiler to generate object types Java Beans Check this to enable the schema compiler to generate Java beans Default Tables Check this to enable the schema compiler to generate default tables REGISTER_NODOCID Check this to prevent the creation of this column if the user wishes to optimize on storage REGISTER_BINARYXML Check this to register the schema for Binary XML REGISTER_NT_AS _ IOT Check this to store nested tables created during schema registration as index organized tables REGISTER_AUTO_OOL Check this to automatically move large types out of line Enable Hierarchy 86 ENABLE_HIERARCHY NONE Enable hierarchy will not be called on any tables created while registering that schema ENABLE_HIERARCHY CONTENTS Enable hierarc
14. 3 Click Next at the Welcome Screen 4 Read the License Agreement Accept it and click Next Accept the location of the program icons by clicking Next If you wish to change the destination of the folder for Navicat program click Browse 6 Follow the remaining steps 7 After installed key in the Registration Key 16 digit on the pop up Registration screen and click Activate to online activate the key Migrate Navicat to new computer 1 In Navicat choose File gt Export Connections The exported file ncx contains all your connection settings Backup the exported file ncx In Navicat choose Help gt Registration and click Deactivate to online deactivate the key Uninstall Navicat from the existing computer Re install Navicat in the new computer SNe 2 Open Navicat and choose File gt Import Connections in the new computer When a new connection is being established Navicat will create a subfolder under the Settings Location Most files are stored within this subfolder To look for the path right click the connection and choose Edit Connection gt Advanced gt Settings Location Moreover all your saved profiles are stored under profiles To look for the path choose Tools gt Options gt Miscellaneous gt Profiles Location Maintenance Upgrade How to purchase the maintenance plan Navicat Software Maintenance Plan allows Navicat users to receive priority email support receiving software up
15. Avglorders AmountPaid Coun Max orders AmountPaid Min orders AmountPaid a Sumf orders AmountPaid Expression To Concatenate Fields In the Calcs tab click on the field that has been added to the list of Calculations at the bottom Then select Expression as the Function type for the calculation and enter the expression such as CONCAT FIRST_NAME LAST NAME Tables Fields Calcs Search Group Group Search Sort SQL Available Fields Field Alias Field SQL Alias Function Name CONCAT FIRST _CONCAT FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME To Edit SQL There may be times when you need to utilize advanced features of SQL that cannot be accessed via the visual interface of the Query Designer In these cases you can edit the SQL manually in the Query Designer Once you have edited the SQL manually you must always use the SQL tab of the Query Designer to make future modifications and no longer use the visual design tabs to modify the query In the SQL tab right click over the SQL text and choose Edit SQL Tables Fields Calcs Search Group Group Search Sort SQL Te Name 1 SELECT 2 CONCAT FIRST NAME LAST NAME AS CONCAT FIRST 3 FROM clients clients lt gt 254 Report Design The Design tab allows you to build and design reports The design workspace is divided into two areas the workbench and the canvas The workbench is comprised of toolbars component pale
16. Buffering Use the buffering build technique to build the index Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 2 or later Fast Update The usage of the fast update technique Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 4 or later Constraints If you wish to create partial index enter constraint condition in this edit box A partial index is an index that contains entries for only a portion of a table usually a portion that is more useful for indexing than the rest of the table Comment Define the comment for the index Fields Editor Select the field s from the Name list You can also use the arrow buttons to change the index field s order Collation Choose the collation for the index Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Sort Order Specify the sort order ASC or DESC Nulls Order Specify that nulls sort before NULLS FIRST after NULLS LAST non nulls PostgreSQL Table Foreign Keys A foreign key specifies that the values in a column or a group of columns must match the values appearing in some row of another table We say this maintains the referential integrity between two related tables In the Foreign Keys tab just simply click a foreign key field for editing By using the foreign key toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected foreign key field Button Deseripton Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table amp Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key Use the Name edit box to enter
17. CASCADE A CASCADE action propagates the delete or update operation on the parent key to each dependent child key For an ON DELETE CASCADE action this means that each row in the child table that was associated with the deleted parent row is also deleted For an ON UPDATE CASCADE action it means that the values stored in each dependent child key are modified to match the new parent key values SET NULL If the configured action is SET NULL then when a parent key is deleted for ON DELETE SET NULL or modified for ON UPDATE SET NULL the child key columns of all rows in the child table that mapped to the parent key are set to contain SQL NULL values The SET DEFAULT actions are similar to SET NULL except that each of the child key 135 DEFAULT columns is set to contain the columns default value instead of NULL Deferred Deferred foreign key constraints are not checked until the transaction tries to COMMIT Related topic Foreign Keys Data Selection SQLite Table Uniques Unique constraints ensure that the data contained in a column or a group of columns is unique with respect to all the rows in the table In the Uniques tab just simply click an unique field for editing By using the unique toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected unique field Button Description o m Add Unique Add an unique to the table Delete Unique Delete the selected unique Use the Name edit box to set the u
18. Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key Use the Referenced Schema and Referenced Table drop down lists to select a foreign schema and table respectively To include field s referenced field s to the key just simply double click the Fields Referenced Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing The On Delete and On Update drop down list define the type of the actions to be taken No Action The Database Engine raises an error and the delete or update action on the row in the parent table is rolled back Corresponding rows are deleted from or updated in the referencing table if that row is deleted from 155 or updated in the parent table Set Null All the values that make up the foreign key are set to NULL when the corresponding row in the parent table is deleted or updated Set Default All the values that make up the foreign key are set to their default values when the corresponding row in the parent table is deleted or updated Enable You can choose whether to enable disable the foreign key constraint by checking unchecking the box Not For Replication The constraint is not enforced when replication agents perform insert update or delete operations Note SQL Azure does not support Comment Specify the comment of the foreign key Note SQL Azure does not support Related topic Foreign Keys Data Selection SQL Server Table Uniques Unique constraints ensure that the
19. and optionally include the schema definitions themselves as well as system privilege grants to those schemas If you do not have the EXP_FULL_ DATABASE role you can export only your own schema 48 In table mode only a specified set of tables partitions and their dependent objects are unloaded You must have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role to specify tables that are not in your own schema All specified tables must reside in a single schema Content Unload both data and metadata DATA_ONLY Unload only table row data no database object definitions are unloaded METADATA_ONLY Unload only database object definitions no table row data is unloaded Export Data Select the objects to export If you select TABLE mode choose the schema in the Export Schema Table Mode drop down list Dump Files Add dump files to the dump file set for the export Metadata Filter Include or Exclude a set of objects from the Export operation Choose the Object Type and specify the Name Clause Data Filter Query Specify a subquery that is added to the end of the SELECT statement for the table Sample Specify a percentage for sampling the data blocks to be moved Remap Data Table schema The schema containing the column to be remapped Table name The table containing the column to be remapped Column Name The name of the column to be remapped Package Schema The schema of the package Package Name
20. delete the selected index field Button Description S O ls Add Index Add an index to the table Fia Delete Index Delete the selected index Use the Name edit box to set the index name No schema name can be included here the index is always created in the same schema as its parent table To include field s in the index just simply double click the Fields field or click L to open the editor for editing Note Some of field types do not allow indexing by several fields The Index method drop down list defines the type of the table index Unique Makes index unique causes the system to check for duplicate values in the table when the index is created if data already exist and each time data is added Clustered CLUSTER instructs PostgreSQL to cluster the table specified by tablename based on the index specified by indexname The index must already have been defined on tablename When a table is clustered PostgreSQL remembers on which index it was clustered The form CLUSTER tablename reclusters the table on the same index that it was clustered before Concurrently When this option is used PostgreSQL will build the index without taking any locks that prevent concurrent inserts updates or deletes on the table whereas a standard index build locks out writes but not reads on the table until it s done Tablespace The tablespace in which to create the index Fill Factor The fillfactor for an index 96
21. film_list co nicer_but_slower_film_list INNER JOIN payment lt ON payment customer_id customer_list ID INNER JOIN i staff ON payment staff_id staff staff_id o0 sales_by_film_category oo sales_by_store oo staff_list co test aaa hr hr information_schema mysql narfnrmanre crhams lt LIMIT 10 20 Code completion is ready WHERE payment amount gt 0 5 GROUP BY customer_list ID customer_list NAME staff store_id HAVING ORDER BY staff store_id ASC Query time 0 000s Setting Field Association To associate database objects by two fields just drag one field from the object to another and a line will appear between the linked fields Hint To delete all the links of some object click button next to the object alias Go to the Syntax pane to change the association between the links click the operator and choose the properties item from the pop up menu You can change the association condition by choosing it from the list lt gt lt lt gt gt Click OK to confirm the changes you made Also you can change the type of Join Setting Output Fields The fields you have selected in the Diagram Design pane will be displayed in the Syntax pane which allows you to set their displaying order and modify the output fields of the query using lt Distinct gt lt func gt and lt Alias gt lt Distinct gt Enable this option if you wish the repeated records are not includ
22. 8 v gt a Find Data MI Highlight all _ Replace c 98 e SE E S SELECT FROM customer LIMIT 0 1000 Record 1 of 599 in page 1 The search starts at the cursor s current position to the end of the file There will not have differentiates when performing a uppercase or lowercase search To find for the next text just simply click Next or press F3 Replacing Records To open the Replace bar simply check the Replace box and enter the text you want to search and replace Click Replace or Replace All button to replace the first occurrence or all occurrences automatically If you clicked Replace All button you can click Apply button to apply the changes or Cancel button to cancel the changes Q Find Data MA Jex Replace Finding Columns To search a column just simply click Edit gt Q Find from the menu or press CTRL F Then choose Find Column and enter a search string 193 File Edit View Window Help i Begin Transaction store_id first_name 1 EA 1 PATRICIA 1 LINDA 2 BARBARA 1 ELIZABETH 2 JENNIFER 1 MARIA 2 SUSAN 2 MARGARET 1 DOROTHY 2 LISA 1 NANCY customer_id v on OW F amp F whe a b oud od N Oo Memo Y Filter Sort last_name SMITH JOHNSON WILLIAMS JONES BROWN DAVIS MILLER WILSON MOORE TAYLOR ANDERSON THOMAS Q Find Column hame first_name toS last_name SELECT FROM cust E Import E gt Export email address_i MARY S
23. A directory object specifies an alias for a directory on the server file system where external binary file LOBs BFILEs and external table data are located All directories are created in a single namespace and are not owned by an individual schema Click aS gt Directory to open an object list for Directory 87 General Properties Directory Path Specify the full path name of the operating system directory of the server where the files are located The path name is case sensitive Oracle Tablespaces Tablespaces are the allocation of space in the database that can contain schema objects Click as gt Tablespace to open an object list for Tablespace General Properties Tablespace Type PERMANENT A permanent tablespace contains persistent schema objects Objects in permanent eee eaea a TEMPORARY A temporary tablespace contains schema objects only for the duration of a session Objects in T ea UNDO An undo tablespace is a type of permanent tablespace used by Oracle Database to manage undo data if you are running your database in automatic undo management mode Name Set the name of the datafile tempfile Size Set the size of the datafile tempfile Unit Define the size unit of the datafile tempfile Specify the maximum disk space allowed for automatic extension of the datafile Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes
24. Also there is no warranty of non infringement and title or quiet enjoyment PremiumSoft does not warrant that the Software is error free or will operate without interruption The Software is not designed intended or licensed for use in hazardous environments requiring fail safe controls including without limitation the design construction maintenance or operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control and life support or weapons systems PremiumSoft specifically disclaims any express or implied warranty of fitness for such purposes d If applicable law requires any warranties with respect to the Software all such warranties are limited in duration to thirty 30 days from the date of delivery e No oral or written information or advice given by PremiumSoft its dealers distributors agents or employees shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of ANY warranty PROVIDED HEREIN 7 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY a Neither PremiumSoft nor its suppliers shall be liable to you or any third party for any indirect special incidental punitive or consequential damages including but not limited to damages for the inability to use equipment or access 16 data loss of business loss of profits business interruption or the like arising out of the use of or inability to use the Software and based on any theory of liability including breach of contract breach of warranty tort
25. An object type consists of two parts a specification and a body The type body always depends on its type specification A collection type is a named varying array varray or a nested table type Click aS gt Type to open an object list for Type The Code Outline window displays information about the object type object type body including declaration etc To show the Code Outline window simply choose View gt Code Outline Note Available only in Full Version button osn o Penesnmecossomne o E stow te deta view otte code une Ha Expand the selected item Collapse the selected item Toggle sorting by position Object Type s Definition Enter the object type s definition After saving the object type you can edit the Object Type Body Just click b New Object Type Body or ka Design Object Type Body to open the Type Body Designer Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Object Type Body s Definition Enter the object type body s definition To edit the Object Type Specification click P Design Object Type Specification to open the Object Type Designer Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Collection Type Nested table Create a nested table type VArray Create a varray type Array Size Determine the array size of the varray type 85 Data Type
26. If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table use Open Table You can create a table shortcut by right click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data directly without activating the main Navicat To empty a table right click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop up menu This option is only applied when you wish to clear all the existing records without resetting the auto increment value To reset the auto increment value while emptying your table use Truncate Table Oracle Normal Tables Tables are the basic unit of data storage in an Oracle database Data is stored in rows and columns You define a table with a table name and set of columns In a normal heap organized table data is stored as an unordered collection heap Oracle Table Fields In the Fields tab just simply click a field for editing A right click displays the pop up menu or by using the field toolbar you can create new and drop the selected field To search a field name choose Edit gt Find or press CTRL F Button Description ooo Add Field Add a field to the table Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field Note Only available when creating a new table Delete Field Delete the selected field P Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key
27. It allows you to create and edit queries without knowledge of SQL The database objects are displayed in left pane Whereas in the right pane it is divided into two portions the upper Diagram Design pane and the lower Syntax pane Note Query Builder supports SELECT statement only Use Query Editor for creating complex queries Drag a table or a view from the left pane to the Diagram Design pane or double click it to add it to query To include a field in the query check the left of the field name in the Diagram Design pane To include all the fields click at the left of the object caption To remove the object from the Diagram Design pane click the cross button at the object caption To add the table view alias simply double click the table view name and enter the alias in the Diagram Design pane Hint You are also allowed to set criteria by right click any fields from the Diagram Design pane 200 File Edit Format View Run Window Help B Run Stop E Explain Query Builder Query Editor amp sakila actor E address Ep category E city country customer E film EH film_actor E film_category film_text inventory EF language Ep payment EF rental staff store OOOOOOUOURRL Ta New H Save ES SaveAs Beautify SQL Export Result amount T otal OOSOOOOL OOSOOOOOOL customer _list ID customer_list NAME Sum payment amount AS Total staff store_id customer_list co actor_info oo customer _list
28. It supports to import MySQL PostgreSQL Oracle SQLite SQL Server or MariaDB databases schema tables or views Navicat provides a step by step wizard for you to complete the task 1 Select Tools gt Import from Database Select a connection Choose databases schemas or tables you want to import Click Start nn N You can also simply create a new model using reverse engineering in the Navicat main window Right click an opened database schema table s or view s and select Reverse Database to Model Reverse Schema to Model Reverse Tables to Model or Reverse Views to Model from the pop up menu script Generation After finishing your model you can save table structures views and foreign keys from the model into a script file The Export SQL feature generates a SQL file for the script Select Tools gt Export SQL General Settings for Export SQL File Set the output file name and location Objects Choose objects in current model you wish to export Advanced Settings for Export SQL The following options depend on the diagram database type you are chosen MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and MariaDB Server Version Select server version for the SQL file 221 Include Schema Include the schema name in file with this option is on Otherwise only object names are included in SQL statements Default Schema set the schema name for the objects without schema settings Include Drop SQ
29. Login Name Set name for login Password Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Specify Old Password Check this option to enter the old password used by this account Enabled Check to enable the login Roles In the grid check the server role to assign this server login to be a member of selected server role Multiple roles can be granted Note Every SQL Server login belongs to the public server role When a server principal has not been granted or denied specific permissions on a securable object the user inherits the permissions granted to public on that object Only assign public permissions on any object when you want the object to be available to all users SQL Azure does not support User Mapping In the Grid check the Database and enter the User and Default Schema to create user for login the database and specify the first schema will be searched by the server Note SQL Azure does not support Server Permissions You can check Grant With Grant Option or Deny against the server permissions listed in Permission to assign this login to have that permission Multiple permissions can be granted Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Endpoint Permissions You can check Alter Connect Control Take Ownership or View Definition against the endpoint listed in Endpoint to assign this login to have that endpoint permission Multiple permissions can be granted Note Support
30. MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE WEEK SECOND YEAR_MONTH DAY_HOUR DAY_MINUTE DAY SECOND HOUR_MINUTE HOUR_SECOND MINUTE_SECOND Oracle Objects To start working with the server objects you should create and open a connection When you create a user account you are also implicitly creating a schema for that user A schema is a logical container for the database objects such as tables views triggers and so on that the user creates The schema name is the same as the user name and can be used to unambiguously refer to objects owned by the user Other user schemas are showed under E Schemas Hint Oracle interprets non quoted object identifiers as uppercase In Navicat all objects identifier will be quoted That is Navicat saves exactly what you have inputted Oracle Data Pump Available only in Full Version Oracle Data Pump technology enables very high speed movement of data and metadata from one database to another lt includes two utilities Data Pump Export and Data Pump Import 47 Data Pump Export is a utility for unloading data and metadata into a set of operating system files called a dump file set The dump file set can be imported only by the Data Pump Import utility The dump file set can be imported on the same system or it can be moved to another system and loaded there Data Pump Import is a utility for loading an export dump file set into a target system The dump file set is made up of one or more disk
31. Note The process will be faster if this option is unchecked Insert records Delete records Update records Check these options to performing such actions to the target when data are synchronized structure Synchronization Available only in Full Version Navicat allows you to compare and modify the table structures with detailed analytical process In other words Navicat compares tables between two databases and or schemas and states the differential in structure Select Tools gt E Structure Synchronization from the main menu To open a saved profile select the profile and click Load button or double click it in Profiles tab Note Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB Navicat Premium and Navicat for MySQL support synchronize between MySQL and MariaDB General Settings for Structure Synchronization The following options depend on the database type you are chosen MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB Source Target Define connection database and or schema for the source and target 242 Compare Tables Check this option if you want to compare tables between the source and target Compare Primary Keys Check this option if you want to compare table primary keys Compare Foreign Keys Check this option if you want to compare table foreign keys Compare Character Set Check this option if you want to compare character set of tables Compare Auto Increment Value Che
32. Open Table View Double click a table view in the Explorer s Model Tab or the Diagram Add table view from Drag table view from Navicat main window and drop to the Diagram Get Table View Select and copy a table view in the Diagram Canvas and paste it to other Structure SQL text editors Statement Design Field without Select and click the table name and press TAB DOWN ARROW to add edit Table Designer fields Navicat will predict field types according to field names you entered INTEGER int int4 NUMBER suffix id no if it is the first column it will be predicted as a primary key suffix num qty number exactly age count DECIMAL 10 2 decimal 10 2 NUMBER REAL money 226 to drag the field to a desired location to drag the desired field out of the table Add Vertex to Foreign Select a foreign key line arrow in Diagram Canvas Press and hold the suffix price cost salary FLOAT double float8 NUMBER REAL float size height width length weight speed distance DATE datetime date TEXT datetime2 z date time VARCHAR 255 varchar 255 VARCHAR2 255 TEXT other field names Enter before the field name to recognize as primary key e g itemNoz int Enter between field name and field type to custom field type e g itemName varchar 255 Delete Vertex on Select a foreign key line arrow in Diagram Canvas Press and hold the Foreign Key Line Arrow
33. SHIFT key and click on the vertex Select a Page in Print Press and hold the SHIFT key then point to a page to show the page Preview number Press and hold the SHIFT key then click a page to jump to the corresponding page in Diagram Canvas 22 Advanced Tools Navicat provides a number of powerful tools for working with data which includes Import Wizard Export Wizard Dump SQL File Execute SQL File and more Import Wizard Import Wizard allows you to import data to tables from CSV TXT XML DBF and more You can save your settings as a profile for setting schedule Note Navicat Essentials version only supports to import text based files such as TXT CSV HTML XML and JSON file To open the Import Wizard click E Import Wizard from the table object list toolbar Hint You can drag a supported file to the Table s Object List pane or a database schema in the Connection pane Navicat will pop up the Import Wizard window If existing table is highlighted Navicat will import the file to the highlighted table Otherwise import the file to a new table Setting Import File Format Step 1 Select one of the available import types for the source file Note The Excel file format is according to the Microsoft Office version installed in your computer Setting Source File Name Step 2 Browse the source file name The file extension in the Import from text box changes according to the selected import type in ste
34. SQL for objects to be changed Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be changed in the target SQL for objects to be dropped Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be dropped from the target Drop with CASCADE Check this option if you want to cascade to drop the dependent database objects Compare after execution Compare tables after the synchronization is executed Continue on error Ignore errors that are encountered during the synchronization process Create inheriting parent Create tables of inheriting parents during the synchronization process Structure Synchronization Result Source Objects Target Objects The tree view shows the differences between the source and target database and or schema after the comparison of their structures providing with detailed SQL statements shown in the Queries for Modification list 244 The red item represents the non existence for the other database schema The blue item represents the existence for the other database schema but different definition detected You are allowed to edit object structure manually right click the menu to open the relevant designer object in the tree view and select Edit from the pop up Source Objects Target Objects D customer A 4 Tables A D customer_copy D clients D fixed_length_data b A customer 4 items 4 gt Fields OrderNo double NULL D
35. SQLite Table Triggers 138 SQLite Table Options 139 SQLite Views 139 SQLite Indexes 140 SQLite Triggers 141 SQL Server Objects 142 SQL Server Backup Restore Available only in Full Version 148 SQL Server Backup 148 SQL Server Restore 150 SQL Server Schemas 151 SQL Server Tables 152 SQL Server Table Fields 152 SQL Server Table Indexes 154 SQL Server Table Foreign Keys 155 SQL Server Table Uniques 156 SQL Server Table Checks 157 SQL Server Table Triggers 157 SQL Server Table Options 159 SQL Server Table Storage SQL Server Views SQL Server Functions Procedures SQL Server Indexes SQL Server Synonyms SQL Server Triggers SQL Server Backup Devices SQL Server Linked Servers SQL Server Server Triggers SQL Server Assemblies SQL Server Database Triggers SQL Server Partition Functions SQL Server Partition Schemes SQL Preview Maintain Maintain MySQL MariaDB Maintain Oracle Maintain PostgreSQL Maintain SQLite Maintain SQL Server Table Viewer Grid View Using Navigation Bar Editing Records Sorting Finding Replacing Records Filtering Records Available only in Full Version Manipulating Raw Data Formatting Table Grid Form View Available only in Full Version Assistant Editors Filter Wizard Available only in Full Version Query Query Builder Available only in Full Version Query Editor Editor Advanced Features Query Results Query Parameters Debugging Oracle Query Available only in Full Version Model Available only in Navicat P
36. columns Bitmap In a bitmap index a bitmap for each key value is used instead of a list of rowids Parallel With Degree Parallel indexing can improve index performance when you have a large amount of data and have multiple CPUs Enter the degree that determines the number of separate indexing processes Tablespace The tablespace in which to create the index An index can be created in the same or different tablespace as the table it indexes Schema The schema in which to create the index Note To create an index in your own schema at least one of the following conditions must be true e The table or cluster to be indexed is in your own schema e You have INDEX privilege on the table to be indexed e You have CREATE ANY INDEX system privilege 61 To create an index in another schema all of the following conditions must be true e You have CREATE ANY INDEX system privilege e The owner of the other schema has a quota for the tablespaces to contain the index or index partitions or UNLIMITED TABLESPACE system privilege Oracle Table Foreign Keys A foreign key specifies that the values in a column or a group of columns must match the values appearing in some row of another table We say this maintains the referential integrity between two related tables In the Foreign Keys tab just simply click a foreign key field for editing By using the foreign key toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selecte
37. navicat exe exportview ProfileName u NavicatlID t Result ConnectionlType c ConnectionName d DatabaseName s SchemaName Export Table navicat exe export ProfileName u NavicatID t ConnectionType c ConnectionName d DatabaseName s SchemaName Export Oracle and navicat exe exportmview ProfileName u NavicatID t Materialized PostgreSQL ConnectionType c ConnectionName d DatabaseName s View Result SchemaName Export Query navicat exe exportquery ProfileName u NavicatlD t Result ConnectionlType c ConnectionName d DatabaseName s schemaName Query Execution All navicat exe query QueryName u NavicatID t ConnectionType c ConnectionName d DatabaseName s SchemaName Data navicat exe datasync ProfileName t ConnectionType Synchronization Batch Jobs navicat exe batchjob BatchJobName Print Report navicat exe report ReportName u NavicatID t ConnectionType c Note ConnectionName d DatabaseName s SchemaName FileType PathName sc DataPipelineName Value Value NavicatID if the connection stores in Navicat Cloud Navicat ID is required e g user example com ConnectionType type of the connection MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite MSSQL or MariaDB type of the data transfer profile MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite MSSQL MariaDB or Profile Type Premium FileType output report file type pdf html excel or printer PathName printer name or target file path e g
38. of the primary XML index PROPERTY Create a secondary XML index on columns PK path and node value of the primary XML index where PK is the primary key of the base table Primary XML Index Specify the primary XML index to use in creating a secondary XML index Advanced Properties for XML Index Recompute statistics Enable automatic statistics updating Allow row locks Row locks are allowed when accessing the index The Database Engine determines when row locks are used Allow page locks Page locks are allowed when accessing the index The Database Engine determines when page locks are used Fill Factor Specify a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of each index page during index creation or rebuild Pad Index The percentage of free space that is specified by fillfactor is applied to the intermediate level pages of the index Sort in tempdb Specify to store temporary sort results in tempdb Max degree of parallelism Override the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration of the index operation General Properties for Spatial Index 166 Table View Must be TABLE Table name Select a table Spatial Column Select a spatial column which the index is based Tessellation Scheme The tessellation scheme for the spatial index Min Coordinates Specify the x coordinate X and y coordinate Y of the lower left corner of t
39. or the user Streams Configuration Check this box to import any general Streams metadata that may be present in the export dump file Data Options A bitmask to supply special options for processing the job Partition Options Specify how partitioned tables should be handled during an import operation NONE Partitioning is reproduced on the target database as it existed in the source database DEPARTITION Each partition or subpartition that contains storage in the job is reproduced as a separate unpartitioned table MERGE Each partitioned table is re created in the target database as an unpartitioned table Version The version of database objects to be extracted COMPATIBLE The version of the metadata corresponds to the database compatibility level and the compatibility release level for feature LATEST The version of the metadata corresponds to the database version 54 Encryption Password Specify a key for re encrypting encrypted table columns metadata or table data so that they are not written as clear text in the dump file set Segment Attributes Designate the segment attribute to which the transform applies Storage Designate the storage to which the transform applies OID Designate the OID to which the transform applies PCTSpace Specify a percentage multiplier used to alter extent allocations and datafile sizes Used to shrink large tablespaces for testing purposes Log File Dire
40. view when the view is executed The legal characteristic values are Definer and Invoker These indicate that the view must be executable by the user who defined it or invoked it respectively The default Security value is Definer Check option Restrict the Check option only to the view being defined Cascaded Cause the checks for underlying views to be evaluated as well View Viewer View Viewer displays the view data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details Note Transaction is only available for updatable views MySQL MariaDB Functions Procedures Stored routines procedures and functions are supported in MySQL 5 0 A stored routine is a set of SQL statements that can be stored in the server Once this has been done clients do not need to keep reissuing the individual statements but can refer to the stored routine instead Click a to open an object list for Function Function Wizard fi Click the New Function from the object list toolbar The Function Wizard will pop up and it allows you to create a procedure function easily You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new procedure function 1 Select the type of the routine Procedure or Function 2 Define the parameter s Set the parameter Mode Name and or Type under corresponding columns 3 If you create a function select the Return Type from the list and enter the corresponding information L
41. 222 Float 00 Date dd mm yyyy Time hh mm ss am pm Example 16 1 2013 18 23 50 Output 16 01 2013 18 23 50 Formats are defined by constructing a string using these format specifiers Numeric fields Specifier Represent Digit placeholder If the value being formatted has a digit in the position where the 0 appears in the format string then that digit is copied to the output string Otherwise a 0 is stored in that position in the output string e g with 0000 placed in the Integer field all the integer output from the table will have 0012 in format Digit placeholder If the value being formatted has a digit in the position where the appears in the format string then that digit is copied to the output string Otherwise nothing is stored in that position in the output string e g with placed in the Integer field all the integers output from the table will have 12 34 in format Decimal point The first character in the format string determines the location of the decimal separator in the formatted value any additional characters are ignored The actual character used as a the decimal separator in the output string is determined by the DecimalSeparator global variable The default value of DecimalSeparator is specified in the Number Format of the Region and Language Options section in the Windows Control Panel Thousand separator If the format string contains one or more characters the output wil
42. 4 1 clients under circumstances where the server would otherwise generate long password hashes The option does not affect authentication 4 1 and later clients can still use accounts that have long password hashes but it does prevent creation of a long password hash in the user table as the result of a password changing operation SSL Type MySQL can check X509 certificate attributes in addition to the usual authentication that is based on the username and password To specify SSL related options for a MySQL account use the REQUIRE clause of the GRANT statement This option tells the server to allow only SSL encrypted connections for the account This means that the client must have a valid certificate but that the exact certificate issuer and subject do not matter The only requirement is that it should be possible to verify its signature with one of the CA certificates SPECIFIED Issuer This places the restriction on connection attempts that the client must present a valid X509 certificate issued by CA issuer lf the client presents a certificate that is valid but has a different issuer the server rejects the connection Use of X509 certificates always implies encryption so the SSL option is unnecessary in this case Subject This places the restriction on connection attempts that the client must present a valid X509 certificate containing the subject subject lf the client presents a certificate that is valid but has a differen
43. BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS THEN DO NOT INSTALL THE SOFTWARE AND RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE THIS EULA SHALL APPLY ONLY TO THE SOFTWARE SUPPLIED BY PREMIUMSOFT CYBERTECH LTD HEREWITH REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OTHER SOFTWARE IS REFERRED TO OR DESCRIBED HEREIN 1 Definitions a Non commercial Version means a version of the Software so identified for use by i the individual who is a natural person and not a corporation company partnership or association or other entity or organization ii the individual who is a student faculty or staff member at an educational institution and iil staff of a non profit organization or charity organization only For purposes of this definition educational institution means a public or private school college university and other post secondary educational establishment A non profit organization is an organization whose primary objective is to support an issue or matter of private interest or public concern for non commercial purposes b Not For Resale NFR Version means a version so identified of the Software to be used to review and evaluate the Software only PremiumSoft means PREMIUMSOFT CYBERTECH LTD and its licensors if any d Software means only the PremiumSoft software program s and third party software programs in each case supplied by PremiumSoft herewith and corresponding documentation associated media printe
44. CACHE Indicate that the blocks retrieved for this table are placed at the most recently used end of the least recently used LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed NOCACHE Indicate that the blocks retrieved for this table are placed at the least recently used end of the LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed 65 Parallel With Degree Specify the degree of parallelism which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Row Movement With the option on it allows the database to move a table row It is possible for a row to move for example during table compression or an update operation on partitioned data Physical Attributes Refer to Physical Attributes Default Storage Characteristics Oracle External Tables External tables access data in external sources as if it were in a table in the database While creating external tables you are actually creating metadata in the data dictionary that enables you to access external data Note that external tables are read only No DML operations are possible and no index can be created Fields for Oracle External Tables In the Fields tab just simply click a field for editing A right click displays the pop up menu or by using the field toolbar you can create new and drop the selected field To search a field name choose Edit gt Find or press CTRL F Button Description O ZO O 2OSSSSSSSOO aE Add Field A
45. Class The schema and the name of a b tree operator class for the subtype Collate The name of an existing collation to be associated with a column with a range type Canonical Schema and Canonical The schema and the name of the canonicalization function for the range type Subtype Diff Schema and Subtype Diff The schema and the name of a difference function for the subtype Owner The owner of the type 128 PostgreSQL Tablespaces A tablespace allows superusers to define an alternative location on the file system where the data files containing database objects such as tables and indexes may reside Click as gt Tablespace to open an object list for Tablespace Note Tablespace was added in PostgreSQL 8 0 The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later General Properties Location The directory that will be used for the tablespace The directory must be empty and must be owned by the PostgreSQL system user The directory must be specified by an absolute path name Owner The name of the user who will own the tablespace If omitted defaults to the user executing the command Only Superusers may create tablespaces but they can assign ownership of tablespaces to non superusers PostgreSQL Casts A cast specifies how to perform a conversion between two data types Click as gt Cast to open an object list for Cast Note The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later General Properties
46. Clustered Indexes Note SQL Azure does not support this tab On Filegroup Option Description Filegroup Choose a filegroup that storing the index File Stream Filegroup Choose a filegroup for FILESTREAM data Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later On Partition Scheme Option Description Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme that storing the index Partition Column Choose a partition column name File Stream Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme for FILESTREAM data Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Data Compression Specify the data compression option for the specified index partition number or range of partitions Choose the Type for the patition Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later General Properties for XML Index Table View Must be TABLE Table name Select a table 165 XML Column Select the xml column on which the index is based XML Index Type PRIMARY A clustered index is created with the clustered key formed from the clustering key of the user table and an XML node identifier PATH Create a secondary XML index on columns built on path values and node values in secondary the primary XML index In the PATH secondary index the path and node values are key columns that allow efficient seeks when searching for paths VALUE Create a secondary XML index on columns where key columns are node value and path
47. Create Auto Increment Fields during the import process Note Support only when file type is MS Access database Paradox file or DBase file Import Deleted Records Import the deleted records in the DBase file during the import process Note Support only when file type is DBase file Saving and Confirming Import Step 8 Click Start button to start the import process You can view the running process indicating success or failure These messages are saved in file Loglmport ixt Hint Click Save button to save your settings as a profile for setting schedule You can click Log button to view the log file Export Wizard Export Wizard allows you to export data from tables views or query results to any available formats You can save your settings as a profile for setting schedule Note Navicat Essentials version only supports to export text based files such as TXT CSV HTML XML and JSON file To open the Export Wizard click ES Export Wizard from the object list toolbar 233 Setting Export File Format Step 1 Select one of the available export formats for the target file Note The Excel file format is according to the Microsoft Office version installed in your computer Navicat 64 bit version does not support exporting to mdb file Setting Destination File Name Step 2 Set exported file name and location You can check the box next to table name in Source directly to assign a default file name and locatio
48. Database Role Designer General Properties Role name Set name for database role Owner You can enter the owner for this database role This owner can be database user or database role If the owner is not specified this database role will be owned by the user who executes the CREATE ROLE 284 Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure In the Role Membership grid check the database user to assign the selected database user to be a member of this database role Multiple roles can be granted Owned Schemas You can check the schema listed in Owned Schemas tab to change schema ownership to this database role Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Object Permissions To edit specific object permission for database role click Add Permission to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object 2 Check the object to show the grid on the right panel In the grid check Grant With Grant Option or Deny against the permission listed in Privilege to assign this database role to have that permission Multiple permissions can be granted SQL Server Application Role Designer General Properties Role name Set name for role Default Schema You can specify the first schema that will be searched by the server for this application role Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Password Set Password and re type it
49. Extract SQL Extract SQL allows extracting SQL into a SQL file from your backup file To extract SQL from a backup file open a database and select an existing backup file Click gt Extract SQL from the backup object list toolbar Batch Job Schedule Available only in Full Version Navicat allows you to create a batch job for setting schedule to execute at one or more regular intervals beginning and ending at a specific date and time using Windows Task Scheduler Batch job can be created for Query Report printing Backup Data Transfer Data Synchronization Import and Export from databases You can define a list of actions to be performed within one batch job either run it manually or at the specified time periodically Click to open an object list for Schedule The messages indicate the running process success or failure are saved in file LogCmd txt Click Set Task Schedule to set schedule for batch job Note Please save the batch job before setting schedule Passwords must be saved in Connection Properties and Windows Scheduler before running your schedule Connection Properties Windows Scheduler 248 User Name root Gat in C Program Files Premium Soft Navicat Premium Password PT iit Save Password navicat win8 navicat General Settings for Batch Job Schedule Zi Move objects from the Available Jobs list to the Selected Jobs list by using Select button double clicking or dragging th
50. Foreign Keys Check this option if you want to compare table foreign keys Compare Indexes Check this option if you want to compare indexes Compare Triggers Check this option if you want to compare triggers Compare Character Set Check this option if you want to compare character set of tables Compare Auto Increment Value Check this option if you want to compare auto increment values of tables Compare Uniques Check this option if you want to compare uniques Compare Checks Check this option if you want to compare checks Compare Excludes Check this option if you want to compare excludes Compare Rules Check this option if you want to compare rules Compare Collation Check this option if you want to compare collation of tables Compare Views Check this option if you want to compare views Compare Definer Check this option if you want to compare the definers of views SQL for objects to be created Check this option to include all related SQL statements if new database objects will be created in the target SQL for objects to be changed Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be changed in the target 224 SQL for objects to be dropped Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be dropped from the target Continue on error Ignore errors that are encountered during the synchronization process Viewing Com
51. KB 192 KB 192 KB 64 KB 176 KB 176 KB 16 KB 1552 KB 1552 KB 64 KB 16 KB Project DT 0052 Members k J fe Activity Mary Brown updated connection Testing Server 02 Mary Brown added model Company Mary Brown removed model Company PSJ Adam Smith updated model S AdventureWorks Katherine Marriott added model SOL_3schemas AdventureWorks Company HR Katherine Marriott removed model Order Model FS Adam Smith added model Order g Model Hint You can sign in with the same Navicat ID you use for the Navicat Customer Center Sign in Navicat Cloud 1 Choose File gt Navicat Cloud from the main menu Click Sign In button y Enter your Navicat ID and Password mobile app Enter the received code to sign in Create a project 1 Select Navicat Cloud 2 Right click it and choose New Project Add members to a project 1 Right click a project and choose Collaborate with 2 Click Add Members 3 Enter the members Navicat ID 21 If you enabled two step verification in Navicat Cloud Portal site a code will be sent to your phone via your 4 Select the member role 5 Click Add Read Objects Write Objects Manage Members and Delete Project Read Objects Write Objects and Manage Members Read Objects and Write Objects Note Each time can add up to 10 members Use comma or enter to separate the members in the edit box Manage members in a project 1 Right click a project a
52. LENGTH Note Some of data types do not allow indexing by several fields For example BLOB 37 Index Type Define the type of the table index Normal NORMAL indexes are the most basic indexes and have no restraints such as uniqueness Unique UNIQUE indexes are the same as NORMAL indexes with one difference all values of the indexed column s must only occur once Full Text FULL TEXT indexes are used by MySQL in full text searches Index method Specify an index type when creating an index BIREE or HASH Comment Set any optional text describing the current index Note Support from MySQL 5 5 3 or later MySQL MariaDB Table Foreign Keys A foreign key is a field in a relational table that matches the primary key column of another table The foreign key can be used to cross reference tables In the Foreign Keys tab just simply click a foreign key field for editing By using the foreign key toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected foreign key field Note Foreign Key support from MySQL 3 23 44 or later Editing foreign key is supported from MySQL 4 0 13 or later Button Description amp Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table Note Both tables must be nnoDB type or solidDB type if you have solidDB for MySQL In the referencing table there must be an index where the foreign key columns are listed as the first columns in the same order Starting with MySQL 4 1 2 such an index wil
53. Min Extents Specify the total number of extents to allocate when the object is created O97 Max Extents Specify the total number of extents including the first that Oracle can allocate for the object Check Unlimited if you want extents to be allocated automatically as needed Max Size Specify the maximum size of the storage element Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes Check Unlimited if you do not want to limit the disk space of the storage element Increase Specify the percent by which the third and subsequent extents grow over the preceding extent Freelists For objects other than tablespaces and rollback segments specify the number of free lists for each of the free list groups for the table partition cluster or index Freelist Groups Specify the number of groups of free lists for the database object you are creating Optimal Specify an optimal size for a rollback segment Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes Check Null for no optimal size for the rollback segment Buffer Pool DEFAULT Choose this to indicate the default buffer pool This is the default for objects not assigned to KEEP or RECYCLE KEEP Choose this to put blocks from the segment into the KEEP buffer pool Maintaining an appropriately sized KEEP buffe
54. MySQL Data Types MariaDB Data Types for details Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Decimals edit box to define the number of digits after the decimal point the scale for Floating Point data type Note Be careful when shortening the field length as losing data might be caused Not null Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field Virtual Check this box to enable the virtual column settings for the field Note Support from MariaDB 5 2 or later P Primary Key A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record None of the fields that are part of the primary key can contain a null value Field s Properties 35 Note The following options depend on the field type you are chosen Default Set the default value for the field Comment Set any optional text describing the current field Character set A character set is a set of symbols and encodings Collation A collation is a set of rules for comparing characters in a character set Note MySQL chooses the column character set and collation in the following manner e lf both CHARACTER SET X and COLLATE Y were specified then character set X and collation Y are used e If CHARACTER SET X was specified without COLLATE then character set X and its default collation are used e Otherwise the table character set and collation are used Key Length The edit box will be enabled when
55. Note Available only for MySQL PostgreSQL and MariaDB id course 1 English To edit a Set record just simply click or press CTRL ENTER to open the editor for editing Select the record s from the list To remove the records uncheck them in the same way Note Available only for MySQL and MariaDB 189 id course 1 Maths Sports I 2 Apply Maths Sports Chinese mnnera _ English Maths _ Music Wi Apply Maths Wi Sports OK Cancel To view BFile content just simply enable Preview BFile under the View menu Note Available only for Oracle To generate UUID GUID right click the selected cell and select Generate UUID Note Available only for PostgreSQL and SQL Server Edit Records with Foreign Key Foreign Key Data Selection Available only in Full Version Foreign Key Data Selection is a useful tool for letting you to get the available value from the reference table in an easy way It allows you to show additional record s from the reference table and search for a particular record s To include data to the record just simply click or press CTRL ENTER to open the editor for editing payment_id customer_id staff_id rental_id amount payment_date gt 1 pes 1 76 2 99 2005 05 25 11 30 3 fk_payment_customer payment customer_id customer customer customer_id A gt oN OW kW he 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Just simply double click to select the desired dat
56. Note To adjust the settings for particular table see Table Viewer Lo records per page in foreignkey editor Set the records per page in foreignkey editor value e g 100 in the edit field The number representing the number of records showed per page in Foreign Key Data Selection Synchronize current record When updating inserting a row in table grid if primary key exists it will reload this record from server For example a table with 3 columns id name and timestamp If you update the name column the timestamp will update immediately in the grid Row height Define the height of the row e g 17 used in editor Note To adjust the settings for particular table see Formatting Table Grid Column Width Define the width of the column e g 150 used in editor Note To adjust the settings for particular table see Formatting Table Grid 297 Auto Begin Transaction Check this option if you require auto commit of changing records in table grid Otherwise click FY Commit or Rollback buttons from the Me Begin Transaction button to commit or rollback the changes See Table Viewer Display Formats Data of types integer float date time and datetime can be formatted when displayed on data grids Type the format here to change the format If the formats are left blank default format will be used For date time and datetime fields default formats will be the system datetime formats Display formats Integer
57. PLDBGBREAE 5 CONTEXT PL pgSQL function TEM Q line 3 at assignment Debug Get Port Number Debug Attach Port Debug Attach Session Debug Step Into public TEM O You can perform the most commonly used actions for debugging on the toolbar or menu Button Description p Run mi Step Over a Step Out Start running code in debug mode Enter the Input Parameters if necessary The debugger executes your code until the end of the code or the next breakpoint is reached Keyboard shortcut F9 Resume the execution The current line will be executed If the line is a function call it will bypass the function The counter will then move to the next line of code Keyboard shortcut F8 Resume the execution The current line will be executed If the line is a function call the counter goes to the first statement in the function Otherwise the counter will move to the next line of code Keyboard shortcut F7 Resume the execution The remaining part of the code within the current function will be executed Keyboard shortcut SHIFT F7 E Stop Stop stepping the code The execution will stop and cannot resume it The Code pane shows the code of the function You can add remove breakpoints for debugging by clicking inthe grey area beside each statement The Breakpoints tab displays all the breakpoints You can delete a breakpoint or all breakpoints right click a breakpoint and choose Remove Breakpoint or Remove All Breakpo
58. Primary Key is set Binary As of MySQL 4 1 values in CHAR and VARCHAR fields are sorted and compared according to the collation of the character set assigned to the field Before MySQL 4 1 sorting and comparison are based on the collation of the server character set you can declare the field with the BINARY attribute to cause sorting and comparison to be based on the numeric values of the bytes in field values BINARY does not affect how field values are stored or retrieved Auto Increment The AUTO INCREMENT attribute can be used to generate a unique identity for new rows To start with the AUTO INCREMENT value other than 1 you can set that value in Options tab Unsigned UNSIGNED values can be used when you want to allow only non negative numbers in a field and you need a bigger upper numeric range for the field As of MySQL 4 0 2 floating point and fixed point types also can be UNSIGNED Unlike the integer types the upper range of column values remains the same Zerofill The default padding of spaces is replaced with zeros For example for a field declared as INT 5 ZEROFILL a value of 36 4 is retrieved as 00004 for a field declared as FLOAT 20 10 ZEROFILL a value of 0 1 is retrieved as 000000000 1000000015 Note If you specify ZEROFILL for a numeric type MySQL automatically adds the UNSIGNED attribute to the field On Update Current_Timestamp As of 4 1 2 you have more flexibility in deciding which TIMESTAMP
59. The Definition tab defines the statement to execute when the trigger activates To include your statement just simply click to write If you want to execute multiple statements use the BEGIN END compound statement construct Execute As Specify the security context under which the trigger is executed Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure User Choose a user that the trigger executes in Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Encrypted Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Not For Replication Indicate that the trigger should not be executed when a replication agent modifies the table that is involved in the trigger Note SQL Azure does not support 158 With Append Specify that an additional trigger of an existing type should be added Note SQL Azure does not support Definition Type Choose the type of definition Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Comment Specify the comment of the trigger Note SQL Azure does not support SQL Server Table Options Table Lock Escalation Specify the allowed methods of lock escalation for a table Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Identity Seed The value used for the very first row loaded into the table Identity Increment The incremental value added to the identity value of the previous row loaded Current Identity Value Set th
60. The name of the package 49 Package Function A PL SQL package function which is called to modify the data for the specified column Encryption Encryption Content Specify what to encrypt in the dump file set ALL Enable encryption for all data and metadata in the export operation DATA_ONLY Only data is written to the dump file set in encrypted format ENCRYPTED COLUMNS _ ONLY Only encrypted columns are written to the dump file set in encrypted format METADATA_ONLY Only metadata is written to the dump file set in encrypted format NONE No data is written to the dump file set in encrypted format Encryption Algorithm Identify which cryptographic algorithm should be used to perform encryption Encryption Mode Option Description Transparent Allow an encrypted dump file set to be created without any intervention from a database administrator DBA provided the required Oracle Encryption Wallet is available Encryption Password Provide a password when creating encrypted dump file sets Dual Create a dump file set that can later be imported using either the Oracle Encryption Wallet or the password that was specified with the ENCRYPTION PASSWORD parameter Encryption Password Specify a key for re encrypting encrypted table columns metadata or table data so that they are not written as clear text in the dump file set Confirm Password Re type your password Advanced Properties Thread Number T
61. a tablespace different from the default tablespace to create a table Logging Specify whether creation of a database object will be logged in the redo log file LOGGING or not NOLOGGING Parallel With Degree Specify the degree of parallelism which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Row Movement With the option on it allows the database to move a table row It is possible for a row to move for example during table compression or an update operation on partitioned data Physical Attributes Refer to Physical Attributes Default Storage Characteristics Key Compress Check this option to enable key compression Upon necessary you can also specify the prefix length as the number of key columns which identifies how the key columns are broken into a prefix and suffix entry Mapping Table Specify if there is a mapping table for the index organized table Note that a mapping table is required for creating bitmap indexes on an index organized table Threshold When an overflow segment is being used it defines the maximum size of the portion of the row that is stored in the index block as a percentage of block size 68 Overflow Properties Check to enable an overflow storage area Note After saving the table this option cannot be unchecked Overflow Column Specify the column to be put in a separate overflow data segment Overflow Tablespace Specify the tablespace in which the ove
62. above PostgreSQL Role Designer SQL Server Security 23 239 241 242 242 242 242 244 245 246 246 248 248 249 249 250 250 251 251 252 202 253 253 255 209 200 264 267 269 270 2 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 1 2 1 2 8 SQL Server Login Designer SQL Server Server Role Designer SQL Server Database User Designer SQL Server Database Role Designer SQL Server Application Role Designer SQLite Security SQLite User Designer Privilege Manager Useful Tools List Detail ER Diagram View Object Information server Monitor Available only in Full Version Virtual Grouping Available only in Full Version Connection Colorings Favorites Available only in Full Version Find in Database Schema Available only in Full Version Search Filter Options General Options Appearance Options Model Options Available only in Full Version Miscellaneous Options Commands Available only in Full Version Hot Keys Log Files 280 283 283 284 285 286 286 286 287 287 289 290 291 291 291 292 292 294 294 295 301 301 303 305 308 Getting Started Navicat is a multi connections Database Administration tool allowing you to connect to MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and or MariaDB databases making database administration to multiple kinds of database so easy It also can manage Amazon RDS and Amazon Redshift Features in Navicat are sophisticated enough to provide professional developers for all the
63. all changes performed in the transaction click FY Commit Or click Rollback to undo work done in the current transaction Hint The Commit and Rollback buttons are available only when Auto Begin Transaction is enabled under Options or after clicking the Begin Transaction button e Edit TEXT BLOB BEile Allow you to view and edit the content of TEXT BLOB and BFile fields Note Only Oracle supports BFile e Filter Data Allow you to filter records by creating and applying filter criteria for the data grid e Sort Records Sort Records by custom order of multi fields e Import Data Import data from files e Export Data Export data to files Grid View The the following additional functions set the field value as Null Empty String use current field value as a filter format grid Grid View allows you to view update insert or delete data in a table The pop up menu of the grid provides view and more Using Navigation Bar Table Viewer provides a convenient way to navigate among the records pages using Record Page Navigation Bar buttons All buttons are used to navigate left and right to the previous or the next records pages C E ee SELECT FROM customer LIMIT 0 1000 Record 1 of 599 in page 1 Record Navigation Bar 186 New record enter a new record At any point when you are working with your table in the grid view click on this button to get a blank display for a record First Re
64. and install it on either a portable computer or a computer located at his or her home for his or her exclusive use provided that A the second copy of the Software on the portable or home computer i is not used at the same time as the copy of the Software on the primary computer and ii is used by the primary user solely as allowed for such version or edition Such as for educational use only B the second copy of the Software is not installed or used after the time such user is no longer the primary user of the primary computer on which the Software is installed c Inthe event the Software is distributed along with other PremiumSoft software products as part of a suite of products collectively the Studio the license of the Studio is licensed as a single product and none of the products in the Studio including the Software may be separated for installation or use on more than one computer d You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form solely for backup purposes You must reproduce on any such copy all copyright notices and any other proprietary legends on the original copy of the Software You may not sell or transfer any copy of the Software made for backup purposes e You agree that PremiumSoft may audit your use of the Software for compliance with these terms at any time upon reasonable notice In the event that such audit reveals any use of the Software by you other than in full compliance with the terms of this
65. been set on SYS SUBPTAT2 Line 17 Breakpoint has been set on SYS SUBPTAT2 Line 13 Breakpoint has been set on SYS SUBPTAT2 Line 11 Source breakpoint at line 11 of SYS SUBPTXT2 Source txt 5 s subpNotFound a Log Breakpoints E DBMS Output You can perform the most commonly used actions for debugging on the toolbar or menu Button Description Run Start running code in debug mode The debugger executes your code until the end of the code or the next breakpoint is reached Keyboard shortcut F9 Step Over Resume the execution The current line will be executed If the line is a procedure or function call it will bypass the procedure or function The counter will then move to the next line of code Keyboard shortcut F8 Step In Resume the execution The current line will be executed If the line is a procedure or function call the counter goes to the first statement in the procedure or function Otherwise the counter will move to the next line of code Keyboard shortcut F7 T Step Out Resume the execution The remaining part of the code within the current procedure or function man will be executed Keyboard shortcut SHIFT F7 H Step End Resume the execution The counter will jump to the last line of the procedure or function a Stop Stop stepping the code The execution will stop and cannot resume it The Code pane shows the code of the procedure function You can add remove breakpoints for debugging by clickin
66. browser will open with Navicat Cloud Portal site Upgrade Manage the Navicat Cloud plan 1 Choose File gt Navicat Cloud from the main menu 2 Click Upgrade or Manage Plan 3 A browser will open with Navicat Cloud Portal site Sign out Navicat Cloud 1 Right click Navicat Cloud and choose Close All Connections to close all connections under Navicat Cloud 2 Choose File gt Navicat Cloud from the main menu 3 Click your email and choose Sign Out General Settings To successfully establish a new connection to local remote server no matter via SSL SSH or HTTP set the connection properties in the General tab If your Internet Service Provider ISP does not provide direct access to its server Secure Tunneling Protocol SSH HTTP is another solution Enter a friendly name to best describe your connection in Connection Name text box After you logged in Navicat Cloud feature you can choose to save the connection to My Connections or the projects in Navicat Cloud from Add To drop down list If you choose My Connections its connection settings and queries are stored in the local machine When editing a connection in Navicat Cloud you can choose to synchronize the user name to cloud by enabling the Sync User Name with Navicat Cloud option MySQL and MariaDB Connections You can connect to your MySQL server remotely however for security reasons native remote direct connections to the MySQL server are disabled Therefore you can
67. by the VarT ype property The format is controlled by the DisplayFormat property variable Navicat Report does not support this control Used for calculations via an Object Pascal event handler assigned to the OnCalc event or a RAP event handler assigned to the OnCalc event Access the Calculations dialog via the speed menu or the Calc tab of the Report Designer to code a RAP calculation for this component La Image Used to display bitmaps and windows metafiles in reports Assign the Picture property of this component in order to place an image in your report Use the Report Designer s built in picture dialog to load images at design time Mt Shape Use this component to print various shapes squares rectangles circles ellipses Set the Shape property to select a type of shape Use the Brush and Pen properties to control the color and border respectively w Line Display single and double lines either vertical or horizontal Set the Style property to control whether the line is single or double Set the Weight property to control the line thickness in points Set the Position property to control whether the line is vertical or horizontal ll Chart Used to display standard non data aware Charts This component enables you to use Chart inside the Report Designer You can access the Chart editor via a pop up menu M BarCode Used to render barcodes The string value assigned to the Data property is encoded based on the
68. data contained in a column or a group of columns is unique with respect to all the rows in the table In the Uniques tab just simply click an unique field for editing By using the unique toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected unique field Button Description oo Add Unique Add an unique to the table Delete Unique Delete the selected unique Use the Name edit box to set the unique name To set field s as unique just simply double click the Fields field or click to open the editor for editing Clustered Indicate that a clustered index is created for the unique constraint Comment Specify the comment of the unique Note SQL Azure does not support 156 SQL Server Table Checks A check a constraint that enforces domain integrity by limiting the possible values that can be entered into a column or columns In the Checks tab just simply click a check field for editing By using the check toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected check field Button Description OZ OZ O Add Check Add a check to the table Delete Check Delete the selected check Use the Name edit box to set the check name Check Set the condition for checking e g field_name1 gt 0 AND field_namez2 gt field_namei in the Check edit box Enable You can choose whether to enable disable the check constraint by checking unchecking the box Not For Replication The constrai
69. definition for the trigger Example BEGIN add_job_history old employee_id old hire_date sysdate old job_id old department_id END 64 When Clause Specify the trigger condition which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger This condition must contain correlation names and cannot contain a query Referencing Old Specify correlation names The default correlation name is OLD Referencing New Specify correlation names The default correlation name is NEW Follows Specify the relative firing order of triggers of the same type Note Support from Oracte 11g or later Schema Define the trigger on the current schema Oracle Table Options Tablespace Define a tablespace different from the default tablespace to create a table Logging Specify whether creation of a database object will be logged in the redo log file LOGGING or not NOLOGGING Compression Specify whether to compress data segments to reduce disk use It is valid only for heap organized tables COMPRESS Enable table compression COMPRESS FOR ALL Attempt to compress data during all DML operations on the table OPERATIONS Bere o oon press oeta gurna s DML onsen ee COMPRESS FOR DIRECT_LOAD Attempt to compress data during direct path INSERT operations OPERATIONS when it is productive to do so NOCOMPRESS Disable table compression Cache Indicate how blocks are stored in the buffer cache
70. error occurs while executing the query execution stops the appropriate error message Is displayed The Result tab displays the result data returned by the query as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details Hint Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or In a New Tab Naming Result Tab To name the result tab simply add NAME tab_name or NAME tab_name before each SELECT statement in the Query Editor Example NAME Q1 SELECT from table1 NAME Q2 SELECT from table2 Query Profile and Status Available only for MySQL and MariaDB To show the profile and status when running the query simply choose View gt Show Profile and Status and click gt Run on the toolbar The Profile tab displays the query profile Table lock System lock Statistic etc Note For MySQL 5 0 support from 5 0 37 or above For MySQL 5 1 support from 5 1 24 or above The Status tab displays the query status Bytes received Bytes sent etc 206 Query Parameters Query Builder and Query Editor both support using of parameters inside the query text You can set query parameters to add variable values to a query each time you run it The parameter should appear as an identifier with at its beginning quote with e g any_nam
71. exists in destination update it Otherwise add it Delete delete records in destination that match records in source Copy delete all records in destination repopulate from the source Advanced Hint To activate the remaining options you must enable Primary Key in step 6 Target Field Source Field Primary Key A I Species No Species Mo Category Category Common_Name Common_Name Species Name Species Name Length cm Length cm Length_In Length_In Graphic Graphic Click Advanced button for more settings The following options depend on the database type you are chosen MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and MariaDB Run multiple queries in each execution Check this option if you want to run multiple queries in each execution Use extended insert statements Insert records using extended insert syntax 232 Example INSERT INTO users VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 2 Johnson Ryne 56 0 Katherine 23 Use empty string as NULL Import NULL value if the source data field contains empty string Use Foreign Key constraint Add foreign key if there is foreign key relations between tables Continue on error Ignore errors that are encountered during the import process Include Unique Index and Foreign Key Include Unique Index and foreign key during the import process Note Support only when file type is MS Access database or ODBC Create Auto Increment Fields
72. failure of ongoing operations that need undo space in those segments Tablespace Group To determine whether tablespace is a member of a tablespace group Flashback ON Oracle Database will save Flashback log data for this tablespace and the tablespace can participate in a FLASHBACK DATABASE operation OFF Oracle Database will not save any Flashback log data for this tablespace Use Encryption Enable the encryption properties of the tablespace Algorithm To select the encryption algorithm Oracle Public Database Links Public database Link is a database link created by a DBA on a local database that is accessible to all users on that database Click as gt Public Database Link to open an object list for Public Database Link See Database Link for details 90 Oracle Public Synonyms Public synonym is a synonym owned by the special user group named PUBLIC and every user in a database can access it Click as gt Public Synonyms to open an object list for Public Synonyms See Synonyms for details PostgreSQL Objects To start working with the server objects you should create and open a connection If the server is empty you need to right click the connection in the Connection pane and choose New Database to create a new database General Properties To create a database you must have the Can create database usecreatedb right Refer to Role Designer or User Designer on how to set user properties Data
73. files that contain table data database object metadata and control information The files are written in a proprietary binary format During an import operation the Data Pump Import utility uses these files to locate each database object in the dump file set Click to open an object list for Data Pump You can change the Directory of the dump file set by right click anywhere in the Object List pane and select Change Directory from the pop up menu Note Support from Oracle 10g or later Data Pump requires SYSDBA Role and the dump file set is stored in the server Oracle Data Pump Export Before execute the Data Pump Export click Generate SQL button to review the SQL Then you can click Execute button to run it You can save the Data Pump Export settings to a profile Simply click the Save button Hint The profiles exp are saved under the Settings Location To show the hidden tabs advanced options check the Show Advanced Options box General Properties Job Name The name of the job FULL In a full database export the entire database is unloaded This mode requires that you have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role TABLESPACE In tablespace mode only the tables contained in a specified set of tablespaces are Mode unloaded If a table is unloaded its dependent objects are also unloaded Both object metadata and data are unloaded SCHEMAS If you have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role then you can specify a list of schemas
74. for group click s Add Privilege to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object Check the object to show the grid on the right panel 3 Inthe grid check Grant option against the privilege listed in Privilege to assign this group to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted PostgreSQL Server 8 1 or above Starting from PostgreSQL version 8 1 users and groups were no longer distinct kinds of entities now there are only Roles Any role can act as a user a group or both The concept of roles subsumes the concepts of users and groups PostgreSQL Role Designer General Properties Role Name Set name for role Role ID Specify an ID for the role This is normally not necessary but may be useful if you need to recreate the owner of an orphaned object If this is not specified the highest assigned role ID plus one with a minimum of 100 will be used as default Note In PostgreSQL versions 8 1 or above the specified ID will be ignored but is accepted for backwards compatibility Can login Check this option to create a role that allow to login A role having this option can be thought of as a user Roles without this attribute are useful for managing database privileges but are not users in the usual sense of the word Password Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Note If you do not plan to use password au
75. for the same argument values but that its result could change across SQL statements This is the appropriate selection for functions whose results depend on database lookups parameter variables such as the current time zone etc Also note that the current_timestamp family of functions qualify as stable since their values do not change within a transaction 124 VOLATILE The function value can change even within a single table scan so no optimizations can be made Relatively few database functions are volatile in this sense some examples are random currval timeofday But note that any function that has side effects must be classified volatile even if its result is quite predictable to prevent calls from being optimized away an example is setval Security of definer Specify that the function is to be executed with the privileges of the user that created it Returns Set Indicate that the function will return a set of items rather than a single item Strict Indicate that the function always returns null whenever any of its arguments are null If this parameter is specified the function is not executed when there are null arguments instead a null result is assumed automatically Estimated cost A positive number giving the estimated execution cost for the function in units of cou_operator_cost If the function returns a Set this is the cost per returned row If the cost is not specified 1 unit is assum
76. from SQL Server 2005 or later Login Permissions 282 You can check Alter Control Impersonate or View Definition against the server login listed in Login to assign this server login to have that login permission Multiple permissions can be granted Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later SQL Server Server Role Designer General Properties In the Role Membership grid check the server role to assign the selected server role to be a member of this server role Multiple roles can be granted Note SQL Azure does not support server role SQL Server Database User Designer General Properties for SQL Server 2000 User Name Set name for database user Login Name Assign SQL Server login that this database user uses When this SQL Server login enters the database it will retrieve the information of this database user General Properties for SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure User Name Set name for database user User Type Select the type for database user For Login Login Name Assign SQL Server login that this database user uses When this SQL Server login enters the database it will retrieve the information of this database user Default Schema You can specify the first schema that will be searched by the server for this database user For Certificate Certificate Name Specify the certificate for this database user Note SQL Azure does not support For Asymmetric Asymmetric Key Name 28
77. lt PartNo gt 1313 lt PartNo gt 235 lt Qty gt 10 lt Qty gt lt Discount gt 50 lt Discount gt lt RECORD gt lt RECORDS gt Define Record Delimiter Field Delimiter and Text Qualifier for file Date Order Date Delimiter Zero Padding Date Time Delimiter Define the formats of date and time Decimal Symbol Define the format of decimal number Binary Data Encoding Set binary data is exported as Base64 encoded or None encoding in file Saving and Confirming Export Step 5 Click Start button to start the export process You can view the running process indicating success or failure These messages are saved in file LogExport txt Hint Click Save button to save your settings as a profile for setting schedule You can click Open button to open the exported file or the log file Data Transfer Available only in Full Version Navicat allows you to transfer database objects from one database and or schema to another or to a sql file The target database and or schema can be on the same server as the source or on another server You can save your settings as a profile for setting schedule Select Tools gt Data Transfer from the main menu Hint You can drag tables to a database schema in the Connection pane If the target database schema is within the same connection Navicat will copy the table directly Otherwise Navicat will pop up the Data Transfer window To open a saved profile select t
78. not allowed once the data transfer is triggered off Drop target objects before create Check this option if database objects already exist in the target database and or schema the existing objects will be deleted once the data transfer starts Create target database schema if not exist Create a new database schema if the database schema specified in target server does not exist Use DDL from SHOW CREATE TABLE If this option is on DDL will be used from show create table Use DDL from sqlite_master If this option is on DDL will be used from the SQL TE_MASTER table Advanced Settings for Cross Server Data Transfer Available only in Navicat Premium Navicat Premium supports transferring table with data across different server types e g from MySQL to Oracle If you are transferring between MySQL and MariaDB you can refer to Advanced Settings for Same Server Type Data Transfer The following options depend on the database type you are chosen MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and MariaDB Create tables Create tables in the target database and or schema with this option is on 239 Suppose this option is unchecked and tables already exist in the target database schema then all data will be appended to the destination tables Include indexes Include indexes in the table with this option is on Include foreign key constraints Include foreign keys in the table with this option is on Convert obje
79. requires input parameter the Input Parameters box will pop up Hint Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets Debug Available only in Full Version To debug the function procedure click Debug on the toolbar to launch the Oracle Debugger Enter the Input Parameters if necessary You can add remove breakpoints for debugging by clicking inthe grey area beside each statement Oracle Database Links Database link is a named schema object that describes a path from one database to another and are implicitly used when a reference is made to a global object name in a distributed database After you have created a database link you can use it to refer to tables and views on the other database Click d gt Database Link to open an object list for Database Link General Properties Service Name Specify the service name of a remote database User Name The user name used to connect to the remote database using a fixed user database link Password The password for connecting to the remote database 71 Current user With this option checked a current user database link is created The current user must be a global user with a valid account on the remote database Shared Fill in Authentication username and Authentication password when Shared option is enabled Oracle Indexes Index provides a faster access path to table data It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL statement execution on that
80. run BEFORE or AFTER the triggering statement When To specify the trigger condition which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger Events The kind of statement that activates the trigger General Properties for Database Trigger Enable An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction if any evaluates to true Fire When defining a trigger you can specify the trigger timing whether the trigger action is to be run BEFORE or AFTER the triggering statement When To specify the trigger condition which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger Events The kind of statement that activates the trigger Advanced Properties for Table and View Trigger Referencing Old Correlation names of the old nested table Referencing New Correlation names of the new nested table Referencing Parent Correlation names of the parent table Follows To indicate that the trigger should fire after the specified triggers Use the Schema drop down list to select the schema name and Trigger drop down list to select the trigger Note Support from Oracle 11g or later Definition You can edit valid SQL or procedure statements in the trigger definition inside BEGIN and END 84 Oracle Types Type is an user defined datatype that model the structure and behavior of the data in an application
81. s current position to the end of the file There will not have differentiates when performing a uppercase or lowercase search To find for the next text just simply click Next or press F3 Replace To open the Replace Dialog simply check the Replace box and enter the text you want to search and replace Click Replace button to replace the first occurrence Click Replace All button to replace all occurrences automatically Q Find customer ext Highligh Replace order Replace Q Find customer Highlight All Incremental Search Query time 0 0005 Match Case Regular Expression Whole Word Copy with Quotes To copy the SQL statement with quotes just simply right click the highlighted SQL Then select Copy with quotes and choose the format Note Only available in Query View and Materialized View Zoom In Zoom Out Navicat has the ability to zoom in or zoom out the SQL in the editor The zooming options are available from the View menu The same effect can be achieved with keyboard shortcuts e Zoom In CTRL e Zoom Out CTRL 205 e Reset CTRL 0 Hint Range from 10 to 20 Note Files are opened in different tabs will not be effected by the zoom Query Results To run the query click B Run on the toolbar If the query statement is correct the query executes and if the query statement is Supposed to return data the Result tab opens with the data returned by the query If an
82. starting and stopping the database managing database memory and storage creating and managing database users and so on Your database may also include sample schemas SCOTT HR OE OC PM IX and SH which are a set of interlinked schemas that enable Oracle documentation and Oracle instructional materials to illustrate common database tasks When you create a database object you become its owner By default only the owner of an object can do anything with the object In order to allow other users to use it privileges must be granted However users that have the superuser attribute can always access any object Ordinarily only the object s owner or a Superuser can grant or revoke privileges on an object However it is possible to grant a privilege Admin Option Grant Option which gives the recipient the right to grant it in turn to others If the grant option is subsequently revoked then all who received the privilege from that recipient directly or through a chain of grants will lose the privilege Note The special name PUBLIC is accessible to every database user all privileges and roles granted to PUBLIC are accessible to every database user Oracle User Designer General Properties User name Set name for user Authentication Select the authentication method Password Password 272 Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Expire Password Expire the user s password This setting
83. stores records in the order they were added to the table Sorting in Navicat is used to temporarily rearrange records so that you can view or update them in a different sequence Move over the column caption whose contents you want to sort by click the right side of the column and select the Sort Ascending Sort Descending or Remove Sort customer_id store_id z first_name last name 1 Sort Ascending d 2 Sort Descending 3 4 E 5 1 ELIZABETH BROWN Remove Sort 192 To sort by custom order of multi fields click the E Sort from the toolbar Finding Records The Find bar is provided for quick searching for the text in the editor window Just simply click Edit gt Q Find from the menu or press CTRL F Then choose Find Data and enter a search string File Edit View Window Help Begin Transaction Memo F Filter E Sort Ee Import E gt Export customer_id store_id first_name last_name email address_i 1 TES smith MARY SMITH sakilacuston 1 PATRICIA JOHNSON PATRICIAJOHNSON sakila 1 LINDA WILLIAMS LINDA WILLIAMS sakilacus 2 BARBARA JONES BARBARAJONES sakilacus 1 ELIZABETH BROWN ELIZABETH BROWN sakilac 2 JENNIFER DAVIS JENNIFER DAVIS sakilacust 1 MARIA MILLER MARIA MILLER sakilacusto 2 SUSAN WILSON SUSAN WILSON sakilacust 2 MARGARET MOORE MARGARET MOORE sakila 1 DOROTHY TAYLOR DOROTHY TAYLOR sakilac 2 LISA ANDERSON LISA AANDERSON sakilacust 1 NANCY THOMAS NANCY THOMAS sakilacu gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
84. table Click aS gt Index to open an object list for Index You can choose the index Type Normal A normal index does not impose restrictions on the column values Unique A unique index indicates that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the key columns Bitmap A bitmap index created with a bitmap for each distinct key rather than indexing each row separately Bitmap indexes store the rowids associated with a key value as a bitmap Each bit in the bitmap corresponds to a possible rowid Domain A domain index is an index designed for a specialized domain such as spatial or image processing Users can build a domain index of a given type after the designer creates the indextype A cluster index is an index designed for a cluster General Properties for Normal and Unique Indexes Table schema The schema that contains the index Table name The table name Columns Use the Name drop down list to select the field name and Order drop down list to define the order of the index ASC or DESC General Properties for Bitmap Index Table schema The schema that contains the index Table name The table name 72 Bitmap Join Index In addition to a bitmap index on a single table you can create a bitmap join index which is a bitmap index for the join of two or more tables A bitmap join index is a space efficient way of reducing the volume of data that must be joined by performing restrictions in advance
85. tables in use to be closed SQL Azure Firewall Settings You cannot connect to SQL Azure until you have granted your client IP access To access SQL Azure database from your computer ensure that your firewall allows outgoing TCP communication on TCP port 1433 You must have at least one firewall rule before you can connection to SQL Azure Right click the SQL Azure connection and select SQL Azure Firewall Rules from the pop up menu You can add new rule by providing a range of IP address Testing Account Navicat provides evaluated accounts for testing purpose The remote MySQL server connection settings are e Host Name IP Address server1 navicat com e Port 4406 e User Name navicat e Password tesinavicat The remote PostgreSQL server connection settings are e Host Name IP Address server1 navicat com e Port 5432 e Initial Database HR e User Name navicat e Password testnavicat Navicat Cloud Navicat Cloud provides a cloud service for synchronizing Navicat connections queries models and virtual groups from different machines and platforms After adding a connection to Navicat Cloud its connection settings and queries are stored in Navicat Cloud You can synchronize model files to Navicat Cloud and create virtual groups in Navicat Cloud All the Navicat Cloud objects are located under different projects You can share the project to other Navicat Cloud accounts for collaboration 20 File View Favorites Tool
86. that contained the constraint violation continue to be inserted or updated normally No error is returned when the IGNORE conflict resolution algorithm is used 136 REPLACE When a UNIQUE constraint violation occurs the pre existing rows that are causing the constraint violation are removed prior to inserting or updating the current row Thus the insert or update always occurs The command continues executing normally following REPLACE No error is returned by the REPLACE conflict resolution If a NOT NULL constraint violation occurs the NULL value is replaced by the default value for that column If the column has no default value then the ABORT algorithm is used If a CHECK constraint violation occurs then the IGNORE algorithm is used Fields Editor select the field s from the Name list To remove the fields from the unique uncheck them in the same way You can also use the arrow buttons to change the unique field s order Collation To define a collating sequence used for text entries in that column The default collating sequence is the collating sequence defined for that column BINARY Compares string data using memcmp regardless of text encoding NOCASE The same as binary except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower case equivalents before the comparison is performed Note that only ASCII characters are case folded SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the siz
87. the Q Search Data icon to enter the searching criteria report File Edit View Report Help Data Design Preview Qh 0AE eet o Cance Main Page 1 clients RecordID FIRST_NAME LAST NAME ACCT_NBR TELEPHONE CITY 1 Jennifer Davis 1023495 516 292 3945 Wellesley 2 Arthur Jones 2094056 415 941 4321 Los Altos Son aia tr he Rend wena tf C Show all values of the RecordID field yv lt gt Page lofi 269 Server Security Navicat provides security management tool for your server You can add edit delete users grant revoke privileges on the selected database and their database objects Click an to open an object list for User The Object List pane displays all users that exist in the server MySQL MariaDB Security Information about user privileges is stored in the user db host tables_priv columns_ priv and procs_priv tables in the mysql database that is in the database named mysql The MySQL server reads the contents of these tables when it starts MySQL access control involves two stages when you run a client program that connects to the server Stage 1 The server checks whether it should allow you to connect Stage 2 Assuming that you can connect the server checks each statement you issue to determine whether you have sufficient privileges to perform it For examples Create table privilege Drop table privilege or Alter table privilege The server uses the user db and host tables in the mysql databas
88. the function it may be different from normal function arguments Comment Define the comment for the trigger Constraint Create a constraint trigger Deferrable The trigger constraint can be deferred Deferred The trigger constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction Referenced Table Schema and Referenced Table Name The schema and the name of another table referenced by the constraint PostgreSQL Table Options Unlogged The table is created as an unlogged table Data written to unlogged tables is not written to the write ahead log which makes them considerably faster than ordinary tables Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Owner Define the user to own this table Tablespace Define a tablespace different from the default tablespace to create a table Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later 103 Inherits from This option specifies a list of tables from which the new table automatically inherits all columns Use of inheritance creates a persistent relationship between the new child table and its parent table s Schema modifications to the parent s normally propagate to children as well and by default the data of the child table is included in scans of the parent s To set the new table to be inherited from one or several existing tables just simply click L to open the editor s for editing Has Oids Check this option if you want to specify whether rows of the new table shou
89. the list of all server status and their values Note Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL and MariaDB Virtual Grouping Available only in Full Version Virtual Group aims to provide a platform for logical grouping objects by categories so that all objects are effectively preserved Virtual Grouping can be applied on Connection Table View Function Query Report Backup Schedule and Model Right click in the Connection pane the Object List pane and select New Group or Manage Group gt New Group from the pop up menu to create a new group To move object s to a group right click the object s and select Manage Group gt Move To from the pop up menu or drag and drop the object s into the group To move object s back to the top level right click the object s and select Manage Group gt Exclude From Group from the pop up menu or drag and drop the object s to target level in the Connection pane Select View gt Flatten Connection Flatten Object List from the main menu to hide connection object groups Connection Colorings Navicat provides highlighting connections by colors for identifying connections and their database objects The highlighted color displays in the Connection pane and menu bar in its database object window To highlight a connection right click the connection and select Color from the pop up menu Favorites Available only in Full Version Favorites are links to database objects that
90. the operation is attempted on a row AFTER The trigger can be specified to fire after the operation is attempted on a row INSTEAD OF The trigger can be specified to fire instead of the operation is attempted on a row INSERT UPDATE DELETE Choose the events that activate the trigger Insert The trigger is activated whenever a new row Is inserted Update The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified Delete The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted TRUNCATE Trigger defined to fire for TRUNCATE 122 Update Of Fields Specify a list of columns The trigger will only fire if at least one of the listed columns is mentioned as a target of the UPDATE command STATEMENT Specify the trigger procedure should be fired once per SQL statement ROW Specify the trigger procedure should be fired once for every row affected by the trigger event When Specify a Boolean WHEN condition which will be tested to see whether the trigger should be fired Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 0 or later Function Schema and Function name A user supplied function that is declared as taking no arguments and returning type trigger which is executed when the trigger fires Function Arguments An optional comma separated list of arguments to be provided to the function when the trigger is executed The arguments are literal string constants Simple names and numeric constants may be written here too but they will a
91. the server can return null without invoking the function body Note Available only for function and support from SQL Server 2005 or later Definition The Code Outline window displays information about the function procedure including parameter code body etc To show the Code Outline window simply choose View gt Code Outline Note Available only in Full Version ewon oes O 162 Refresh the code outline Show the detail view of the code outline Turn mouse over highlight on or off i Expand the selected item Collapse the selected item Toggle sorting by position Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features a a a Result To run the procedure function click Run on the toolbar If the SQL statement is correct the statement will be executed and if the statement is supposed to return data the Result tab opens with the data returned by the procedure function If an error occurs while executing the procedure function execution stops the appropriate error message is displayed If the function procedure requires input parameter the Input Parameters box will pop up Hint Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets SQL Server Indexes An index in a database lets you quickly find specific information in a table or indexed view An index contains keys built from one or more columns in the table or view and pointers that map to the storage lo
92. the shape from the diagram and put it on the clipboard Copy Copy the shape from the diagram to the clipboard Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram Select All Shapes Select all the shapes in the diagram Delete Delete a shape from the diagram Color Change the color of the shape Border Color only for rectangle ellipse user database cloud trigger server desktop and mobile Change the color of the shape s border Begin Arrow Style only for arrow Change the style of the arrow s back End Arrow Style only for arrow Change the style of the arrow s front Add Vertex only for line and arrow Add a vertex on a line or arrow Delete Vertex only for line and arrow Delete a vertex on a line or arrow Delete All Vertices only for line and arrow Delete all vertices on a line or arrow Bring to Front Bring the shape to the foreground Send to Back Move the shape to the background 218 Create Layers Layers are used to help organize objects e g tables notes images etc on the canvas You can add all related objects to the same layer For example you may choose to add all your sales related tables to one layer To create a new layer click the ir button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas The pop up menu options of the layer object in canvas include Cut Remove the layer from the diagram and put it on the clipboard Copy
93. type from the drop down list Hint For importing multiple tables select other tables from the Source Table drop down list Source Table Target Table Target Field gt EMPLOYEE_ID START_DATE END_DATE JOB_ID arera DEPARTMENT_ID double 0 0 If you are importing data into existing table s you might need to map the source field names manually to the destination table or right click and select Smart Match All Direct Match All and Unmatch All from the pop up menu for quick mapping Target Field Source Field Primary Key A Species No gt Category v Common_Name A Species No Species Name Category Length cm Common_Name Length_In Species Name z Length cm mae Length_In v 231 Target Field Source Field Primary Key A Species No Category gt Common_Name A Smart Match All Species Name Direct Match All Length cm Length_In Graphic Unmatch All If you are importing via ODBC the Condition Query button opens the WHERE dialog where you can specify a WHERE clause to import only certain rows from your source tables In other words import only rows that satisfy the criteria set by you Hint Do not include the word WHERE in the clause Selecting Import Mode Step 7 Select the import mode that defines how the data being imported Import mode Append add records to the destination table Update update record in destination with matching record from source Append Update if record
94. you visit frequently By adding a path to your favorites list you can go to that database objects with a single click instead of having to navigate the connection and database and or schema in the Connection pane 291 To add a link to the favorites list open a database object and choose File gt Add To Favorites or press SHIFT CTRL If database object is opened in tabbed window you can also right click the tab and select Add To Favorites from the pop up menu Enter Favorite Name and select Favorite ID To open a database object from the favorites list select Favorites gt favorite_name from the main menu or press CTRL Select Favorites gt Clear Favorites gt favorite_name from the main menu to remove a link from the favorites list Select Favorites gt Clear Favorites gt Clear All from the main menu to remove all links from the favorites list Note represents 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or 9 Find in Database Schema Available only in Full Version Navicat provides a Find in Database Schema feature offers searching table and view records or object structures within a database and or schema Select Tools gt Find in Database Schema from the main menu 1 Select a target Connection Database and or Schema Enter the search string in Find what Choose to find Data or Structruce in the Look in drop down list gt amp mP Choose the Search Mode Contains Whole Word Prefix or Regular Expression Regular E
95. you want Oracle to select a degree of parallelism equal to the number of CPUs available on all participating instances times the value of the PARALLEL_THREADS PER _CPU initialization parameter With Degree Set the default degree of parallelism for queries and DML on the materialized view after creation Logging Choose LOGGING for logging the creation of Materialized view in the redo log file Choose NOLOGGING for no logging 7 Tablespace Choose the tablespace in which the materialized view is to be created Physical Attributes Set the Physical Attributes of the materialized view Enable Cache The blocks retrieved for the table are placed at the most recently used end of the least recently used LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed For Update Check this to allow a subquery primary key object or rowid materialized view to be updated When used in conjunction with Advanced Replication these updates will be propagated to the master Enable Query Rewrite The materialized view is used for query rewrite Using Index Clause Option Deseription Tablespace Choose the tablespace of the index Physical Attributes Set the Physical Attributes for the default index Oracle Database uses to maintain the materialized view data View Viewer View Viewer displays the view data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details Oracle M
96. 0 AND field_name2 gt field_namei in the Check edit box A check constraint specified as a column constraint should reference that column s value only while an expression appearing in a table constraint may reference multiple columns Definition Enter the definition for the check 99 No Inherit The check constraint will not propagate to child tables Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 2 or later Comment Enter the comment for the check PostgreSQL Table Excludes A exclude constraint guarantees that if any two rows are compared on the specified column s or expression s using the specified operator s not all of these comparisons will return TRUE In the Excludes tab just simply click an exclude field for editing By using the exclude toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected exclude field Note Exclude is supported from PostgreSQL 9 0 or later Button Description OOO Ex Add Exclude Add an exclude to the table C Delete Exclude Delete the selected exclude Use the Name edit box to set the exclude name Index method The name of the index access method to be used Element Choose the element s to be excluded and specify the operator s Tablespace The tablespace of the exclude constraint s index Fill Factor The fillfactor storage parameter of the exclude constraint s index Buffering Use the buffering build technique to build the exclude constraint s index Note S
97. 12 212 212 213 214 215 216 217 217 219 219 220 221 221 221 221 223 223 223 223 225 226 226 228 228 228 228 229 230 231 231 232 233 233 234 234 235 235 236 236 236 Advanced Seitings for Same Server Type Data Transfer Advanced Settings for Cross Server Data Transfer Available only in Navicat Premium Data Synchronization Available only in Full Version General Settings for Data Synchronization Advanced Settings for Data Synchronization Structure Synchronization Available only in Full Version General Settings for Structure Synchronization Structure Synchronization Result Backup Resitore Available only in Full Version Backup Restore Extract SQL Batch Job Schedule Available only in Full Version General Settings for Batch Job Schedule Advanced Settings for Batch Job Schedule Batch Job Converter Available only in Navicat Premium Dump SQL File Execute SQL File Print Database Schema Table Structure Available only in Full Version Console Report Available only in Navicat Premium and Enterprise Version Report Data Report Query Wizard Report Query Designer Report Design Report Wizard Report Design Toolbars Report Dialogs Report Layout Report Preview Server Security MySQL MariaDB Security MySQL MariaDB User Designer Oracle Security Oracle User Designer Oracle Role Designer PostgreSQL Security PostgreSQL Server 7 3 to 8 0 PostgreSQL User Designer PostgreSQL Group Designer PostgreSQL Server 8 1 or
98. 1g Maintain User Expire Password To set password of user account will expire 182 Lock Account To lock user account Unlock Account To unlock user account Maintain PostgreSQL Maintain Database Table and Materialized View Analyze Database Analyze Tables and Analyze Materialized Views Collect statistics about the contents of tables in the database and stores the results in the system table pg_ statistic Subsequently the query planner uses these statistics to help determine the most efficient execution plans for queries Analyze Database examines every table in the current database When VERBOSE is specified ANALYZE emits progress messages to indicate which table is currently being processed Various statistics about the tables are printed as well It is enabled in Navicat by default Vacuum Database Vacuum Tables and Vacuum Materialized Views Reclaim storage occupied by deleted tuples In normal PostgreSQL operation tuples that are deleted or obsoleted by an update are not physically removed from their table they remain present until a Vacuum is done Therefore it s necessary to do Vacuum periodically especially on frequently updated tables Vacuum Database examines every table in the current database When VERBOSE is specified VACUUM emits progress messages to indicate which table is currently being processed Various statistics about the tables are printed as well It is enabled in Navicat by default V
99. 3 Key Specify the asymmetric key for this database user Note SQL Azure does not support Without Login Default Schema You can specify the first schema that will be searched by the server for this database user Roles In the grid check the role to assign this database user to be a member of selected database role Multiple roles can be granted Every database user belongs to the public database role When a user has not been granted or denied specific permissions on a securable the user inherits the permissions granted to public on that securable Owned Schemas You can check the schema listed in Owned Schemas tab to change schema ownership to this database user Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Database Permissions In the grid check Grant With Grant Option or Deny against the database permission listed in Permission to assign this database user to have that permission on the database Multiple permissions can be granted Object Permissions To edit specific object permission for database user click Add Permission to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object 2 Check the object to show the grid on the right panel 3 Inthe grid check Grant With Grant Option or Deny against the permission listed in Privilege to assign this database user to have that permission Multiple permissions can be granted SQL Server
100. 9 Oracle Sequences 80 Oracle Synonyms 81 Oracle Triggers 82 Oracle Types 85 Oracle XML Schemas 86 Oracle Recycle Bin 87 Oracle Directories 87 Oracle Tablespaces 88 Oracle Public Database Links 90 Oracle Public Synonyms 91 PostgreSQL Objects 91 PostgreSQL Debugger Available only in Full Version 91 PostgreSQL Schemas 93 PostgreSQL Tables 93 PostgreSQL Normal Tables 94 PostgreSQL Table Fields 94 PostgreSQL Table Indexes 96 PostgreSQL Table Foreign Keys 97 PostgreSQL Table Uniques 98 PostgreSQL Table Checks 99 PostgreSQL Table Excludes 100 PostgreSQL Table Rules 101 PostgreSQL Table Triggers 102 PostgreSQL Table Options 103 PostgreSQL Foreign Tables 104 Fields for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables 104 Checks for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables 106 Triggers for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables 106 Table Options for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables 108 PostgreSQL Views 108 PostgreSQL Functions 110 PostgreSQL Aggregates 112 PostgreSQL Conversions 113 PostgreSQL Domains 114 PostgreSQL Indexes 115 PostgreSQL Materialized Views 117 PostgreSQL Operators 118 PostgreSQL Operator Classes 119 PostgreSQL Sequences 121 PostgreSQL Triggers 122 PostgreSQL Trigger Functions 123 PostgreSQL Types 125 PostgreSQL Tablespaces 129 PostgreSQL Casts 129 PostgreSQL Foreign Servers 130 PostgreSQL Languages 130 SQLite Objects 131 SQLite Tables 132 SQLite Table Fields 132 SQLite Table Indexes 134 SQLite Table Foreign Keys 135 SQLite Table Uniques 136 SQLite Table Checks 137
101. Agreement you shall reimburse PremiumSotft for all reasonable expenses related to such audit in addition to any other liabilities you may incur as a result of such non compliance f Your license rights under this EULA are non exclusive 3 License Restrictions a Other than as set forth in Section 2 you may not make or distribute copies of the Software or electronically transfer the Software from one computer to another or over a network b You may not alter merge modify adapt or translate the Software or decompile reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to a human perceivable form Unless otherwise provided herein you may not rent lease or sublicense the Software d Other than with respect to a Trial Demo Version Non commercial Lite Version or a Not For Resale Version of the Software you may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer provided you retain no copies you transfer all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA the serial numbers and if applicable all other software products provided together with the Software and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA If the Software is an upgrade any transfer must include all prior versions of the Software from which you are upgrading If the copy of the Software is licensed as part of the whole Studio as defined above the Software sha
102. Bar CodeType If the 256 data to be encoded is in a database use DBBarCode The following symbologies are supported Codabar Code 128 Code 39 EAN 13 EAN 8 FIM A B C Interleaved 2 of 5 Post Net UPC A UPC E IE oDBarCode Used to render two dimensional barcode symbologies Supports PDF417 and MaxiCode barcode types Data Component Toolbar This toolbar will assist in creating data aware report components CA DBText Used for displaying values from all types of database fields Use the DisplayFormat property to format the value DBMemo Used to print plain text from a memo field of a database table This control will automatically word wrap the text Set the Stretch property to True and the component will dynamically resize to print all of the text Use the ShiftRelativeTo property to define dynamic relationships with other stretchable objects DBRichText Used to print formatted text from a memo or BLOB field of a database table This control will automatically word wrap the text Set the Stretch property to True and the component will dynamically resize to print all of the text Use the ShiftRelativeTo property to define dynamic relationships with other stretchable objects i DBCalc Used for simple database calculations Sum Min Max Count and Average The value can be reset when a group breaks using the ResetGroup property 4 DBimage Used to print bitmaps or windows metafiles which are stored in a database BLOB field
103. C Users Guest Desktop report_sample pdf DataPipelineName name of the data pipeline under the Data tab Value value of the criteria with the AutoSearch option is checked under the Search tab of Query Designer 303 under the Data tab Example navicat exe report MyReport u test navicat com t MSSQL c SQL Server 2012 d AdventureWorks s dbo pdf C Users Guest Desktop report_sample pdf sc table1 value1 value2 sc table2 value1 304 Hot Keys Navicat Main Window eye SS d At CTRL represents 0 to 9 CTRL H History Log F12 Show Only Active Objects Common e SHIFT CTRL represents 0 to 9 Table Designer Table Viewer View Viewer C zo 305 View Query Eo e CTRL R Run SQL Editor CTRL or CTRL Mousewheel Up CTRL or CTRL Mousewheel Down Debugger Kes Ao Report 306 CTRL O Open Report in Report Design CTRL P Print in Report Design CTRL G Groups in Report Design Model C CTRL B Bold Selected Table View Foreign Key or Shape 307 Log Files Navicat provides number of log files to keep track on the actions have been performed in Navicat and they are located in the logs directory e g C Users Guest Documents Navicat Premium logs You are allowed to change the log files location under Options HttpDump log Store information which response from your HTTP Server LogHistory txt Store all SQL statements of all the operati
104. Cih DBChart Allow data aware Charts to be placed within a report im DBBarCode Used to render barcodes based on the BarCode Type and the value supplied via the DataField property The following symbologies are supported Codabar Code 128 Code 39 EAN 13 EAN 8 FIM A B C Interleaved 2 of 5 PostNet UPC A UPC E gi DB2DBarCode Used to render two dimensional barcode based on the BarCode Type and the value supplied via the DataField property The following symbologies are supported PDF417 MaxiCode Advanced Component Toolbar This toolbar will assist in creating advanced report components 257 Region Used to logically group components together Use the ShiftRelativeTo property to move the region in relation to another dynamically resizing component such as Memo RichText or child type Sub Report SubReport Used to handle multiple master details create sideby side reporting effects and hook reports together as one If you need a report to print within the context of a band use a child type subreport If you need to hook reports together use a section type subreport The PrintBehavior property determines the subreport type CrossTab Used to present summarized data in a grid format PageBreak The TppPageBreak component is a report control that allows the user to force a new page during report generation Placing a TppPageBreak component on a report will cause all objects created after the PageBreak Z Order to be
105. Copy the layer from the diagram to the clipboard Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram Select All Layers Select all the layers in the diagram Delete Delete a layer from the diagram Color Change the color of the layer Size to Fit Resize the layer automatically to fit its contents Bring to Front Bring the layer to the foreground Send to Back Move the layer to the background Format Diagram Show Grid To turn the grid on in the diagram canvas choose View gt Show Grid from the menu Snap to Grid To align objects on the canvas with the grid choose View gt Snap To Grid from the menu Change Diagram Notation To change the notation of the diagram choose Diagram gt Diagram Notation and select the notation from the menu 219 Default The default notation style used in Navicat Simple A simple notation style The table and view objects will only show the name IE Crow s Foot Crow s Foot notation style IDEF1X The ICAM DEFinition language information modeling method Change Diagram Dimensions To change the number of pages used in the diagram choose Diagram gt Diagram Dimensions from the menu and set the Width and Height Align Objects To align objects on the canvas select more than one object tables views notes labels images or shapes then right click and choose Alignment gt Align Left Align Center Align Right Align Top Align Middle Align Bot
106. EFAULT NULL FIRS ItemNo double NULL DEFAULT NULL AFTEF PartNo double NULL DEFAULT NULL AFTER Qty bigint 20 NULL DEFAULT NULL AFTER Discount double NULL DEFAULT NULL AFTI a gt Fields OrderNo double NOT NULL DEFAULT 0 FIRS fie _ ItemNo double NOT NULL DEFAULT 0 AFTE PartNo double NOT NULL DEFAULT 0 AFTEI Qty bigint 20 NULL DEFAULT NULL AFTER Discount double NULL DEFAULT NULL AFTE P Primary Keys 4 P Primary Keys 8E Foreign Keys P PRIMARY KEY OrderNo ItemNo PartNo RA Indexes Foreign Keys E Triggers FA Indexes D orders a Triggers gt EB parts gt FQ orders D plbiolife v gt E parts v lt gt lt gt EE New Items E Items Altered All the scripts are unchecked in the Queries for Modification list by default Check the scripts you want to apply to the target You can highlight multiple lines of scripts and then right click to show the pop up menu Choose Checked Scripts Detail to view the full SQL statements you selected Queries for Modification Check to Execute Wa ALTER TABLE items DROP PRIMARY KEY C A ALTER TABLE items MODIFY COLUMN OrderNa PY _ ALTER TABLE items MODIFY COLUMN ItemNo rderNo ALTER TABLE items MODIFY COLUMN PartNo Aoii Beene mNo _ ALTER TABLE parts DROP PRIMARY KEY Uncheck Selected _ ALTER TABLE parts MODIFY COLUMN PartN
107. If you are importing from Access and ODBC the Add Query Delete Query and Modify Query buttons open the Add Query dialog where you can construct query to import only certain rows from your source tables In other words import only rows that satisfy the criteria set by you Tables and queries will be shown in the Tables list Setting Delimiter Step 3 TXT XML TXT Define Record Delimiter Field Delimiter and Text Qualifier for file Choose Fixed Width to import the text file with fixed width format To delimit the source column bounds click on the desired position to create a break line Simply drag it to move it or double click it to remove it 229 Delimited Characters such as comma or tab separate each field Fixed Width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Lines with arrows signify field breaks To CREATE a break line click at the desired position To DELETE a break line double click on the line To MOVE a break line click and drag it 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 u_id name location hk XML Define tag to identify table row Consider tag attributes as table field For example lt row age 17 gt lt id gt 1 lt id gt lt name gt sze lt name gt lt row gt With this option is on Navicat will recognizes age as a table field together with id and name otherwise only id and name will be imported as table fields Note Navicat does not support multiple level of XML file
108. In a New Tab View Builder Available only in Full Version View Builder allows you to build views visually It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL See Query Builder for details Definition You can edit the view definition as SQL statement SELECT statement it implements Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Advanced Properties When Demand The materialized view will be refreshed on demand by calling one of the three DBMS_MVIEW refresh a Commit A fast refresh is to occur whenever the database commits a transaction that operates on a master fm ianea ra na The database automatically refresh the materialized view with the automatic refresh time Never The materialized view will not be refreshed with any Oracle Database refresh mechanism or packaged procedure Method FORCE When a refresh occurs Oracle Database will perform a fast refresh if one is possible or a complete refresh if fast refresh is not possible FAST A incremental refresh method which performs the refresh according to the changes that have occurred to the master tables COMPLETE A complete refresh method which is implemented by executing the defining query of the materialized view Start On A datetime expression for the first automatic refresh time Next A datetime expression for calculating the interval between automatic refreshes N
109. Insert The trigger is activated whenever adding a row to a table or adds an element to a nested table 82 Delete The trigger is activated whenever removing a row from the table or removes an element from a nested table Update The trigger is activated whenever changing a value in one of the fields selected in Update Of Fields General Properties for View Trigger Enable An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction if any evaluates to true Table schema The view schema of the trigger Table name The view you wish to create the trigger Nested Table Field To select the nested table field Compound To specify the Instead Of Trigger Note Support from Oracle 11g or later and you can edit the SQL in Trigger Definition Insert The trigger is activated whenever adding a row to a table or adds an element to a nested table Delete The trigger is activated whenever removing a row from the table or removes an element from a nested table Update The trigger is activated whenever changing a value in a row General Properties for Schema Trigger Enable An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction if any evaluates to true Table schema The table schema of the trigger 83 Fire When defining a trigger you can specify the trigger timing whether the trigger action is to be
110. L Include drop object SQL statements in file with this option in on Include Drop With CASCADE Include drop object SQL statements with cascade option in file with this option in on Include Primary Keys Include primary keys in file with this option is on Include Foreign Keys Include foreign keys in file with this option is on Include Uniques Include uniques in file with this option is on Include Indexes Include indexes in file with this option is on Include Checks Include checks in file with this option is on Include Excludes Include excludes in file with this option is on Include Rules Include rules in file with this option is on Include Triggers Include triggers in file with this option is on Include Character Set Include table and field character set in file with this option is on Include auto increment Include table auto increment values in file with this option is on Include Collation Include table collation in file with this option is on 222 Forward Engineering Forward engineering is one of the key features of Model This feature allows you to compare the model with an existing database or schema states the differences between their structures and offer synchronizing the structures in model to the target connection Navicat provides a step by step wizard for you to complete the task 1 Select Tools gt Synchronize to Database Select the synchronization type
111. Lock All Tables Lock all objects while backup is being processed Use Single Transaction InnoDB only If a table uses InnoDB storage engine with this option is on Navicat uses transaction before the backup process starts Use specify file name Define your file name for backup Otherwise your backup file will be named as 2007 05 10 17 38 20 for example Restore Restore feature will firstly drop the selected objects of the database then recreate the new objects according to your backup Finally inserting the data To restore a backup to an existing database open a database and select an existing backup file Click ity Restore Backup from the backup object list toolbar To restore a backup to a new database create and open a new database and click i Restore Backup from the backup object list toolbar Browse the backup file Note You must have Create Drop and Insert privileges MySQL MariaDB or PostgreSQL to run the restore General Properties 246 Show information of the backup file Object Selection Choose database objects you wish to restore Advanced Properties The following options depend on the database type you are chosen MySQL PostgreSQL SQLite and MariaDB Use Transaction Rollback all data when error occurs Continue on error Ignore errors that are encountered during the restore process Lock tables for write Lock the tables to prevent user to modify tables during the restore process
112. MITH sakilacuston PATRICIAJOHNSON sakila LINDA WILLIAMS sakilacus BARBARAJONES sakilacus ELIZABETH BROWN sakilac JENNIFER DAVIS sakilacust MARIA MILLER sakilacusto SUSAN WILSON sakilacust MARGARET MOORE sakila DOROTHY TAYLOR sakilac LISA ANDERSON sakilacust NANCY THOMAS sakilacu Yv gt Ja a ee i ae Record 1 of 599 in page 1 Filtering Records Available only in Full Version Use either of the following methods to filter the data in the grid e Right click a field and select the Filter from the pop up menu to filter records by the current value of the selected column e The Custom Filter Dialog is provided for quick building a simple filter Just simply right click a field and select the Filter gt Custom Filter from the pop up menu Use character _ to represent any single symbol in the condition and use character to represent any series of symbols in the condition e You can also customize your filter in a more complicated way by right click a field and selecting the Filter gt T Filter from the pop up menu or clicking the T Filter from the toolbar The Filter Wizard becomes visible at the top of grid where you can see the active filtering condition and easily enable or disable it by clicking a check box at the left Manipulating Raw Data Navicat normally recognize what user has input in grid as normal string any special characters or functions would be processed as plain text that is its fun
113. Move the view to the background Create Foreign Keys To add a foreign key click the button from the diagram toolbar and drag and drop a field from the child table to the parent table To show hide the linked name label simply check uncheck the Show Name option in Properties pane The pop up menu options of the foreign key object in canvas include Design Relation Edit the foreign key in a designer The options in the designer depend on the diagram database type you are chosen For the settings see Server Objects Cardinality on table_name1 Set the cardinality on table_name1 None One and Only One Many One or Many Zero or One Zero or Many Cardinality on table_name2 Set the cardinality on table_name2 None One and Only One Many One or Many Zero or One Zero or Many 214 Add Vertex Add a vertex on a foreign key connecter Delete Vertex Delete a vertex on a foreign key connecter Delete All Vertices Delete all vertices on a foreign key connecter Go to Source Go to and select the source child table Go to Target Go to and select the target parent table Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram Select All Relations Select all the foreign keys in the diagram Delete from Diagram and Model Delete a foreign key from the diagram and model Color Change the color of the foreign key Create Labels Labels are typically used to help document the diagram de
114. Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB Click amp Privilege Manager from the user object list toolbar and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object Choose the object and click s Add Privilege to open the window Check the user to show the grid on the right panel E In the grid check the relevant privilege against the privilege listed in Privilege to assign the selected user to have that object privilege Multiple privileges can be granted 286 Useful Tools Navicat provides variety of tools that improve user experience when using Navicat which are Object Information Connection Colorings Search Filter and more List Detail ER Diagram View Navicat provides three types of views for objects in the main window By default Navicat uses the List view in the Object List pane It only shows object names You can select View gt List from the main menu or click HEE at the bottom right hand corner Detail view shows several properties of objects in columns To change to Detail view select View gt Detail from the main menu or click i at the bottom right hand corner To change the display columns of properties select View gt Choose Columns from the main menu and select display columns for different objects from the pop up window Besides List and Detail views Navicat enhances table viewing to a new ER Diagram view In this ER Diagram view you can view t
115. Reuse To allow Oracle to reuse an existing file Path Specify the path of the datafile tempfile Auto Extend To ON enable or OFF disable the automatic extension of a new or existing datafile or tempfile Next Size Specify the size in bytes of the next increment of disk space to be allocated automatically when more extents are 88 required The default is the size of one data block Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes Unlimited Max Unlimited disk space that Oracle can allocate to the datafile or tempfile Max Size Specify the maximum disk space allowed for automatic extension of the datafile Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes Storage File Type BIGFILE A bigfile tablespace contains only one datafile or tempfile which can contain up to approximately 4 billion 2 blocks The maximum size of the single datafile or tempfile is 128 terabytes TB for a tablespace with 32K blocks and 32TB for a tablespace with 8K blocks SMALLFILE A smallfile tablespace is a traditional Oracle tablespace which can contain 1022 datafiles or tempfiles each of which can contain up to approximately 4 million 2 blocks Min Extent Size The minimum size of an extent in the tablespace Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to speci
116. SQL Plus executable in order to get this works By default Navicat will look for the SQL Plus under client folder e g ORACLE HOME bin However if Navicat cannot locate SQL Plus under the SQL Plus default path you are prompted to locate the executable SQL Plus does not support Unicode 251 Report Available only in Navicat Premium and Enterprise Version Report feature helps to deliver data in your database in a presentable manner and to turn it into valuable information Various kinds of reports can be built easily such as invoice statistics mailing labels and more You can save your reports for setting schedule Click to open an object list for Report Hint Report files rtm are saved under the Settings Location To view an archive report 1 Click the Open Report Archive from the object list toolbar 2 Browse your archive file To print report to file PDF HTML Excel or Archive 1 Select the report for printing in the Connection pane the Object List pane 2 Right click and select Print Report As from the pop up menu Report Data The Data tab allows you to select and manipulate the data needed for a report These tasks are accomplished via two visual tools the Query Wizard and the Query Designer These tools greatly simplify the often difficult task of data selection by giving you the ability to select data without requiring an in depth knowledge of databases Data Design Preview customer nE aale Na
117. Select the date time format from the drop down list 234 Selecting Fields for Export Step 3 Select table fields for export All the fields are selected in the Available Fields list by default If you want to omit some fields to be exported uncheck the box All Fields first and then uncheck those fields in the Available Fields list Note For exporting query result the wizard will skip this step Setting Additional Options Step 4 The following options depend on the file format chose in step 1 Include column titles Field names will be included into the exported file if this option is on Append Append records to the existing file If you select Export selected to same file option for multiple tables in step 2 checks this option to append the records Continue on error Ignore errors that are encountered during the export process Use Attributes Format in XML Attributes Format lt RECORDS gt lt RECORD OrderNo 1003 ItemNo 1 PartNo 1313 Qty 5 Discount 0 gt lt RECORD gt lt RECORD OrderNo 1004 ItemNo 1 PartNo 1313 Qty 10 Discount 50 gt lt RECORD gt lt RECORDS gt Non Attributes Format lt RECORDS gt lt RECORD gt lt OrderNo gt 1003 lt OrderNo gt lt ItemNo gt 1 lt ItemNo gt lt PartNo gt 1313 lt PartNo gt lt Qty gt 5 lt Qty gt lt Discount gt 0 lt Discount gt lt RECORD gt lt RECORD gt lt OrderNo gt 1004 lt OrderNo gt lt ItemNo gt 1 lt ItemNo gt
118. Select the source databases schemas tables or views and the target connection from existing connections Choose the compare and execution options Click Compare to generate a set of scripts that show the differences between source and target tables Select the scripts you want to run ee oS eS PL Click Run Query Selecting Synchronization Type Sync with selected schemas Set the synchronization to work on all objects in the selected schemas Sync with selected objects Set the synchronization to work on selected objects only selecting Schemas Objects and Connection In this step choose one or more schemas or objects in model to compare to the target schemas or objects If objects in model are from existing schemas you can select the existing schemas Otherwise enter a target schema name in Objects without schema will synchronize to this schema for the source model objects to compare to Then choose target connection and database from existing connections Selecting Compare and Execution Options The following options depend on the diagram database type you are chosen MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and MariaDB Compare Identifier With Case Sensitive Check this option if you want to compare table identifier with case sensitive option Compare Tables Check this option if you want to compare tables 223 Compare Primary Keys Check this option if you want to compare table primary keys Compare
119. TEAD OF Specify that the DML trigger is executed instead of the triggering SQL statement therefore overriding the actions of the triggering statements Insert The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table Delete The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table Update The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified SQL Statement Specify additional criteria in Definition tab Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later 169 Assembly Specify the method of an assembly to bind with the trigger Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Advanced Properties Caller Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the caller of the module Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Owner Specify the statements inside the module executes in the context of the current owner of the module Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Self Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the specified user is the person creating or altering the module Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure User Specify the statements inside the module execute in the context of the user Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Encrypted Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Not For Replicatio
120. USTER tablename recilusters the table on the same index that it was clustered before Concurrently When this option is used PostgreSQL will build the index without taking any locks that prevent concurrent inserts updates or deletes on the table whereas a standard index build locks out writes but not reads on the table until it s done Tablespace The tablespace in which to create the index Fill Factor The fillfactor for an index is a percentage that determines how full the index method will try to pack index pages 116 Buffering Use the buffering build technique to build the index Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 2 or later Fast Update This setting controls usage of the fast update technique Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 4 or later Constraint If you wish to create partial index enter constraint condition in this edit box A partial index is an index that contains entries for only a portion of a table usually a portion that is more useful for indexing than the rest of the table PostgreSQL Materialized Views Materialized view is a view of a query that is physically materialized The query is executed and used to populate the view at the time the command is issued and may be refreshed later Click aS gt Materialized View to open an object list for Materialized View Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 3 or later You can create a view shortcut by right click a materialized view in the Object List pane an
121. Use Customized Connection Order Check this option to customize the connection order in the Connection pane using drag and drop method Show system items PostgreSQL SQL Server Check this option to show all the system objects such as information_schema and pg_catalog schemas Hint Reopen the database schema to take effect Show auto index SQLite Check this option to show auto index generated for SQLite table in the Index s Object List pane Editor Show Line Number Display line numbers at the side of the editor for easily reference 296 Use Code Folding Code folding allows codes to collapse as a block and only the first line displayed in the editor see Code Folding Use Brace Highlighting Highlight the pair of braces when your cursor moves to either one brace for easily reference see Brace Highlight Tab Width Enter the number of characters that a tab occupies e g 5 Data amp Grid Show TEXT Blob fields in data grids If this option is on data which set as TEXT field type is visible in table grid Otherwise WIDEMEMO will be shown Limit Records Check this option if you want to limit the number of records showed on each page in table grid foreign key data selection globally Otherwise all records will be displayed in one single page al records per page Set the records per page value e g 1000 in the edit field The number representing the number of records showed per page in table grid
122. Wizard The Query Designer presents a series of notebook tabs each tab represents a different part of the query To create the data pipeline using the Query Designer select File gt New under Data tab and double click the Query Designer icon Or you can edit the data pipeline click the following buttons in the data pipeline FBEBQERE OF To Add Search Criteria In the Search tab click on the field that has been added to the list of Criteria at the bottom Then select the Operator and set the Value Tables Fields Calcs Search Group Group Search Sort SQL Available Fields Field Alias Field SQL Alias Table SQL Alias A Company customer C customer Addr 1 customer A customer Addr2 customer A customer v Criteria Field Value Parameter AutoSearch Mar 1000 vin o To Create a Group Sum In the Calcs tab click on the field that has been added to the list of Calculations at the bottom Then select the Function and enter the Field Alias you would like to use for this calculated field 253 Tables Fields Calcs Search Group Group Search Sort SOL Available Fields Field Alias Field SQL Alias Table SQL Alias ItemsTotal orders Item orders TaxRate arders Tax orders Freight orders Frei orders AmountPaid orders a Orders Calculations Field Alias Field SQL Alias SUM_orders_A SUM orders SMM EL EEN maae
123. Wor npe a y 316 2010 06 11 12 21 42 d fs HumanResources a E Tables FA Employee FES EmployeeAddress FES EmployeeDepartmentt FH EmployeePayHistory oo Views J Functions FFs Queries Reports ReportServerTempDB 4 My Connections 4 E MysaL a EN mysal 5 7 information schema performance schema ae a Oem 2 item s found Project MH 0015 FJ Production Server 02 User sa Database AdventureWorks Schema Hur 293 Options Navicat provides a complete user interface customization with various options for all tools Select Tools gt Options from the main menu General Options Windows in taskbar Every new window that is opened automatically is shown on the Windows Taskbar With this option is disabled all instances e g tables queries will be closed while main Navicat exits Hint Restart Navicat to take effect Allow Multiple Form Instances With this option is on you allow opening multiple instances of the same selected window Allow Multiple Navicat Instances Uncheck this item means that clicking on the Navicat shortcut will re activate the running instance of Navicat and not launch a new copy Click to refresh Refresh the Object List pane whenever you click on the objects Show function wizard Display the function wizard MySQL MariaDB Oracle PostgreSQL or SQL Server when you create a new function procedure Ask to save new queries profiles before closing With this optio
124. a Hint By default the number of records showed per page is 100 To show all records right click anywhere on the grid and select Show All To adjust the global settings see Options To refresh the record right click anywhere on the grid and select Refresh or press F5 Click to open a panel on the left for showing a list of column name s Just simply click to show the additional column To remove the column s uncheck them in the same way 190 fk_payment_customer payment customer_id customer customer Wi customer_id _ store_id W first_name email address_id active create_date __ last_update wa last_name first_name 1 MARY 2 PATRICIA 3 LINDA 4 BARBARA 5 ELIZABETH 6 JENNIFER 7 MARIA 8 SUSAN 9 MARGARET customer_id 8a OK lastname SMITH JOHNSON WILLIAMS JONES BROWN DAVIS MILLER WILSON MOORE y gt Cancel l a Hint To set column in ascending or descending mode right click anywhere on the column and select Sort gt E Sort Ascending TE Sort Descending To find for the text in the editor window right click anywhere on the grid and select Find or press CTRL F Enter a value into the edit box and click Ld to filter for the particular record s 8 fk_payment_customer payment customer_id customer customer Wi customer_id __ store_id W first_name W lastname email _ address_id _ active create_date __ last_update first_na
125. a basis for any application you may develop and all copies thereof All rights not specifically granted in this EULA including Federal and International Copyrights are reserved by PremiumSoft and its suppliers 6 LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER a Except with respect to Trial Demo Version Non commercial Lite Version and Not For Resale Version of the software PremiumSoft warrants that for a period of thirty 30 days from the date of delivery as evidenced by a copy of your receipt the physical media on which the Software is furnished will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use The Software is provided as is PremiumSoft makes no warranties express or implied arising from course of dealing or usage of trade or statutory as to any matter whatsoever b PremiumSoft provides no remedies or warranties whether express or implied for Trial Demo version Non commercial Lite version and the Not for Resale version of the Software Trial Demo version Non commercial Lite version and the Not for Resale version of the Software are provided as is c Except as set Forth in the foregoing limited warranty with respect to software other than Trial Demo version Non commercial Lite version and Not for Resale version PremiumSoft and its suppliers disclaim all other warranties and representations whether express implied or otherwise including the warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose
126. a name for the new key 97 Use the Referenced Schema and Referenced Table drop down lists to select a foreign schema and table respectively To include field s referenced field s to the key just simply double click the Fields Referenced Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing The On Delete and On Update drop down list define the type of the actions to be taken RESTRICT Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update would create a foreign key constraint violation This is the same as NO ACTION except that the check is not deferrable NO ACTION Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update would create a foreign key constraint violation If the constraint is deferred this error will be produced at constraint check time if there still exist any referencing rows This is the default action CASCADE Delete any rows referencing the deleted row or update the value of the referencing ANON _ chtmotermmeste wmode woman Match Full Check this option to not allow one column of a multicolumn foreign key to be null unless all foreign key columns are null Deferrable The foreign key constraint can be deferred Deferred The foreign key constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction Comment Define the comment for the foreign key Related topic Foreign Keys Data Selection PostgreSQL Table Uniques Unique constraints ensure that the data contained in a column or a grou
127. abase Date Correlation Optimization Enabled SQL Server maintains correlation statistics between any two tables in the database that are linked by a FOREIGN KEY constraint and have datetime columns Parameterization SIMPLE Queries are parameterized based on the default behavior of the database FORCED SQL Server parameterizes all queries in the database VarDecimal Storage Enabled Indicate that decimal and numeric data types are stored by using the vardecimal storage format 147 SQL Server Backup Restore Available only in Full Version You can backup and restore your SQL Server databases The SQL Server backup and restore component provides an important safeguard for protecting critical data Click EJ to open an object list for SQL Server Backup Note The backup file is stored in the server SQL Server Backup Before starting the backup process click Generate SQL button to review the SQL Then you can click the Backup button to run it If you want to backup with the setting of an existing backup file you can right click a backup file in the Object List pane and choose Backup From This Setting You can save the backup settings to a profile Simply click the Save button Hint The profiles nspb are saved under the Settings Location To show the hidden tabs advanced options check the Show Advanced Options box General Properties Backup Set Name Specify the name of the backup set Description Specify th
128. abase or schema objects you can use the below drop down list to show the SQL which will be run when pressing Save or ES Save As button Maintain Navicat provides a complete solution for maintaining databases and their database objects in MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and MariaDB To maintain server objects you can right click it and select Maintain from the pop up menu Maintain MySQL MariaDB Maintain Table 177 Analyze Tables Analyze and store the key distribution for the table During the analysis the table is locked with a read lock for MyISAM and BDB For InnoDB the table is locked with a write lock Currently MySQL supports analyzing only for MyISAM BDB and InnoDB tables Check Tables Check a table or tables for errors Currently MySQL supports checking only for MyISAM InnoDB and ARCHIVE tables For MyISAM tables the key statistics are updated as well Normal Run the CHECK TABLE statement without an extra option Quick Don t scan the rows to check for wrong links Fast Check only tables that have not been closed properly Changed Only check tables which have been changed since last check or haven t been closed properly Extended Do a full key lookup for all keys for each row This ensures that the table is 100 consistent but will take a long time Optimize Tables The main reason for optimizing your table is to reclaim unused space and to defragment the data file You should optimize a
129. able fields and relationships between tables in a database schema graphically It also allows adding foreign key constraints to tables directly Note Available only in Full Version Only tables provide ER Diagram view Other database objects only provide List view and Detail view Select View gt ER Diagram from the main menu or click HE at the bottom right hand corner An ER diagram will be created automatically if the selected database schema contains tables Hint ER Diagram files are stored under Settings Location 287 File View Favorites Tools Window Help aH am se amp H mo BB fs ky Connection User Table View Function Event Query Report Backup Schedule Model 4 Navicat Cloud Objects b Office 4 Project MH 0015 gt 8 Development Servers A 4 Production Servers D Production Server 02 4 Project DT 0052 adamsmith07198 P store _id tinyint gt Tg Team A manager_staff_id 4 Team B address id small 4 LA Testing Server 02 last_update time hr 4 sakila gt FEA Tables gt oo Views Open Table Design Table D New Table Delete Table E Import Wizard E gt Export Wizard gt fi Functions gt E Events Pf Staff_id tinyint JP address_id small gt EFA Queries first_name varcha address varcha 4 Reports last_name varcha address2 varchar gt J Backups address _id small district varcha 4 Production Server picture blob city_id smallint 4 My Connections email varchar posta
130. abs Model and Diagram Model tab holds all tables or views in the model including those used in each individual diagram You can simply drag an object from the Model tab and drop to the active diagram canvas Diagram tab holds all the objects tables views foreign keys layers notes images etc added to the active diagram If the Explorer pane is hidden choose View gt Show Explorer from the model s menu 208 Diagram Model Diagram Model Dgan Diagram 1 Da sakila actor_info Ct SAET m customer list a ie m film _list Ct ee oe ene PE tee a Cg sakila sales_by_film_category sales_by_film_category im sales_by_store _ staff_list gt Foreign Keys T Labels Motes la Images Shapes User ic Layers ir sakila sales_by_store La sakila staff_list Model History Pane The History pane shows all the actions that you have taken Simply click an action to restore that state If the History pane is hidden choose View gt Show Explorer and Show History from the model s menu Model Properties Pane The Properties pane includes the Model Diagram and Object tabs for setting default properties for your model You can edit the properties settings of the model the active diagram and the selected objects quickly If the Properties pane is hidden choose View gt Show Properties from the model s menu Begin Arrow Style The style of the arrow s back Black and White Check this box to change the diagr
131. acuum Run the VACUUM VERBOSE statement without extra options Vacuum Analyze Update statistics used by the planner to determine the most efficient way to execute a query Vacuum Full Select full vacuum which may reclaim more space but takes much longer and exclusively locks the table Vacuum Full Select full vacuum which may reclaim more space but takes much longer and exclusively Analyze locks the table Update statistics used by the planner to determine the most efficient way to execute a query Select aggressive freezing of tuples Select aggressive freezing of tuples Update statistics used by the planner to determine Analyze the most efficient way to execute a query Reindex Database Reindex Tables and Reindex Materialized Views Rebuild an index using the data stored in the index s table replacing the old copy of the index There are several scenarios in which to use Reindex e An index has become corrupted and no longer contains valid data 183 e An index has become bloated that it is contains many empty or nearly empty pages e You have altered a storage parameter such as fill factor for an index and wish to ensure that the change has taken full effect e An index build with the CONCURRENTLY option failed leaving an invalid index Maintain SQLite Maintain Database and Table Analyze Database and Analyze Tables Gather statistics about tables and indexes and stores the collected information
132. altered then the materialized view remains accessible but it is invalid for query rewrite You can choose this option to explicitly revalidate the materialized view to make it eligible for query rewrite 180 Force Refresh To perform a refresh Maintain Materialized View Log Enable Row Movement To enable row movement Row movement indicates that rowids will change after the flashback occurs Disable Row Movement To disable row movement Shrink Space To compact the materialized view log segments By default Oracle database compacts the segment adjusts the high water mark and releases the recuperated space immediately Maintain Package Compile To recompile the package specification or body Compile Debug To recompile the package specification or body and instruct the PL SQL compiler to generate and store the code for use by the PL SQL debugger Maintain Trigger Enable To enable the trigger Disable To disable the trigger Compile To explicitly compile the trigger whether it is valid or invalid Explicit recompilation eliminates the need for implicit run time recompilation and prevents associated run time compilation errors and performance overhead Compile for Debug To recompile the trigger and instruct the PL SQL compiler to generate and store the code for use by the PL SQL debugger Maintain Type Compile To compile the type specification and body 181 Compile Debug To recompile the typ
133. am color to black and white Bold Check this box or press CTRL B to bold the table view foreign key or shape Border Color The color of the shape s border Cap Style The cap style of the line arrow Case Sensitivity The case sensitivity of the table or view names Available only for MySQL and MariaDB physical models Color The color of the object 209 Dash Style The dash style of the line arrow Database Type The database type of the model Database Version The database version of the model Diagram Notation The notation of the diagram The value for this can be Default Simple IDEF1X UML IE Crow s Foot or Classic End Arrow Style The style of the arrow s front Font Bold Check this box to bold the note label font Font Color The font color of the note label or layer Font Italic Check this box to apply an italic style to the note label font Font Name The font name of the note label or layer Font Size The font size of the note label or layer Height The height of the object Height pages The height of the diagram number of papers Join Style The join style of the line arrow Left The number of pixels from the object to the left side of the canvas Model Type The type of the model 210 Name The name of the object Opacity The transparency of the image shape The value for this can be between 0 to 100 Use 100 for opacity and 0 for transparent
134. and choose Edit Connection Navicat Cloud To copy or move a connection between My Connections and Navicat Cloud right click the connection and choose Copy Connection to or Move Connection to Flush MySQL MariaDB Connection Flush has several variant forms that clear or reload various internal caches flush tables or acquire locks To execute Flush you must have the Reload privilege see MySQL MariaDB Security Right click the connection and select Flush from the pop up menu Privileges Reload the privileges from the grant tables in the mysql database Hosts Empty the host cache tables You should flush the host tables if some of your hosts change IP number or if you get the error message Host host_name is blocked When more than max_connect_errors errors occur in a row for a given host while connection to MySQL server MySQL assumes something is wrong and blocks the host from further connection requests Flushing the host tables allow the host to attempt to connect again Close and reopens all log files If you have specified the update log file or a binary log file without an extension the extension number of the log file will be incremented by one relative to the previous file If you have used an extension in the file name MySQL will close and reopen the update log file Status Reset most status variables to zero This is something one should only use when debugging a query Close all open tables and forces all
135. ange the Beautify SQL settings Option Description Use tab character Check this option to use tab character Tab size Set the tab size Short brace length Set the length of the short brace Upper case keywords Format all the SQL keywords to upper case Save settings Save the SQL beautify options settings after you click Beautify button Minify SQL Available only in Full Version Minify the format of the SQL in the SQL Editor Code Completion Available only in Full Version Code completion in Navicat displays information in drop down lists as you type your SQL statement in the editor it assists you with statement completion and the available properties of database objects for example databases tables fields views etc with their appropriate icons To activate the code completion just simply press for the available properties of database object currently in the scope Query Builder Query Editor SELECT actor actor id actor Mig ctor id iki first name INK T last name last update OM film actor actor id actor actor id om tn h Wb ko E 203 Hint You may invoke code completion by typing two characters or pressing CTRL SPACE on your keyboard for SQL keywords Query Builder Query Editor 1 SELECT 2 actor actor id 3 actor last_name 4 WH nere WHEN WHILE Hint Smart code completion will pop up a list of variants for the word completion automatically Note Code compl
136. ary Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 3 or later Estimated rows A positive number giving the estimated number of rows that the planner should expect the function to return This is only allowed when the function is declared to return a set Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 3 or later Configuration parameter The specified configuration parameter to be set to the specified value when the function is entered and then restored to its prior value when the function exits Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 3 or later Result To run the function click Run on the toolbar If the SQL statement is correct the statement will be executed and if the statement is supposed to return data the Result tab opens with the data returned by the function If an error occurs while executing the function execution stops the appropriate error message is displayed If the function requires input parameter the Input Parameters box will pop up Use to separate the parameters Hint Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets Debug Available only in Full Version To debug the PL pgSQL function click J Debug Function on the toolbar to launch the PostgreSQL Debugger PostgreSQL Aggregates Aggregate functions in PostgreSQL are expressed as state values and state transition functions That is an aggregate can be defined in terms of state that is modified whenever an input item is processed To define a new aggregate function one selects a data type for the
137. at performs statistical analysis for the data type Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later Type Modifier Input Schema and Type Modifier Input The function that converts an array of modifier s for the type into internal form Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 3 or later Type Modifier Output Schema and Type Modifier Output The function that converts the internal form of the type s modifier s to external textual form Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 3 or later General Properties for Composite Type Name The name of an attribute column for the composite type Type The name of an existing data type to become a column of the composite type 127 Length and Scale Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Scale edit box to define the number of digits after the decimal point if required for the selected data type Dimensions The dimensions of array specifiers Collate The name of an existing collation to be associated with a column of a composite type Owner The owner of the type Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later General Properties for Enum Type Label A string literal representing the textual label associated with one value of an enum type Owner The owner of the type General Properties for Range Type Subtype Schema and Subtype The schema and the name of the element type that the range type will represent ranges of Operator Class Schema and Operator
138. ata The materialized view should be populated at creation time View Viewer View Viewer displays the view data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details PostgreSQL Operators PostgreSQL supports left unary right unary and binary operators Operators can be overloaded At least one of LEFTARG and RIGHTARG must be defined For binary operators both must be defined For right unary operators only LEFTARG should be defined while for left unary operators only RIGHTAAG should be defined Click as gt Operator to open an object list for Operator Note LEFTARG Left type RIGHTARG Right type General Properties Owner The owner of the operator function Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later Schema of left type and Left type The data type of the operator s left operand if any This option would be omitted for a left unary operator Schema of right type and Right type The data type of the operator s right operand if any This option would be omitted for a right unary operator Schema of operator function and Operator function The function used to implement this operator 118 Advanced Properties Schema of restrict function and Restrict function The restriction selectivity estimator function for this operator Schema of join function and Join function The join selectivity estimator function for this operator Schema of commutator and Commutat
139. aterialized View Logs Materialized view log is a schema object that records changes to a master table s data so that a Materialized View defined on the master table can be refreshed incrementally Click di gt Materialized View Log to open an object list for Materialized View Log General Properties Table The table of the materialized view log Tablespace The tablespace of the materialized view log Logging To specify either LOGGING or NOLOGGING to establish the logging characteristics for the materialized view log 78 Cache CACHE The blocks retrieved for this log are placed at the most recently used end of the least recently used LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed NOCACHE The blocks are placed at the least recently used end of the LRU list New Values INCLUDING To save both new and old values in the log EXCLUDING To disable the recording of new values in the log Parallel With Degree To determine the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Physical Attributes set the Physical Attributes of a materialized view log Object ID The system generated or user defined object identifier of every modified row should be recorded in the materialized view log Primary Key The primary key of all rows changed should be recorded in the materialized view log Row ID The rowid of all rows changed should be recorded in the materialized view log Sequenc
140. ation how many records to display Note Available only for MySQL PostgreSQL SQLite and MariaDB Query Editor Navicat provides a useful tool called Query Editor for creating and executing queries It allows you to create and edit SQL text for a query prepare and execute selected queries Hint Query text will be automatically generated while you build in Query Builder You are allowed to run selected portion of query just simply right click the highlighted query and select Run Selected You can define multiple SQL statements in one Editor window and the editor let you run the current statement your cursor is on place your cursor in the front of the desired statement Just simply select Run a statement from here or press F7 Note Select Run a statement from here or press F7 the next statement will continue to run Editor Advanced Features Navicat provides a wide range advanced features such as compelling code editing capabilities smart code completion sql formatting and more 202 SQL Formatting To change the SQL statement format simply choose from the Format menu Indent Increase decrease indent for the selected lines of codes Comment Comment uncomment the selected lines of codes Convert Case Format the selected codes into upper lower case Beautify SQL Available only in Full Version Format the selected codes with the Beautify SQL settings Beautify SQL With Available only in Full Version Ch
141. ation or body and instruct the PL SQL compiler to generate and store the code for use by the PL SQL debugger 179 Maintain Index Rebuild To re create an existing index or one of its partitions or subpartitions If the index is marked unusable then a successful rebuild will mark it usable Make Unusable To make the index unusable An unusable index must be rebuilt or dropped and re created before it can be used Coalesce To instruct Oracle database to merge the contents of index blocks where possible to free blocks for reuse Compute Statistics To compute the statistics of the index Monitoring Usage To begin monitoring the index Oracle Database first clears existing information on index use and then monitors the index for use until choosing No Monitoring Usage No Monitoring Usage To terminate monitoring of the index Maintain Java Compile or Resolve To resolve the primary Java class schema object Set AuthID Current User Set the invoker rights to AUTHID CURRENT USER Set AuthID Definer Set the invoker rights to AUTHID DEFINER Maintain Materialized View Enable Row Movement To enable row movement Shrink To compact the materialized view segment By default Oracle database compacts the segment adjusts the high water mark and releases the recuperated space immediately Compile To explicitly revalidate a materialized view If an object upon which the materialized view depends is dropped or
142. ation or removal of the associated row Insert Fire the trigger whenever an INSERT statement adds a row to a table Update Fire the trigger whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in one of the columns specified in Update Of Fields lf no Update Of Fields are present the trigger will be fired whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in any column of the table Delete Fire the trigger whenever a DELETE statement removes a row from the table Update Of Fields Specify the fields for UPDATE statement trigger upon necessary Definition Type in the definition for the trigger When Clause Specify the trigger condition which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger 138 SQLite Table Options Primary Key ON CONFLICT To specify an algorithm used to resolve primary key constraint conflicts ROLLBACK When a constraint violation occurs an immediate ROLLBACK occurs thus ending the current transaction and the command aborts with a return code of SQLITE_ CONSTRAINT If no transaction is active other than the implied transaction that is created on every command then this algorithm works the same as ABORT ABORT When a constraint violation occurs the command backs out any prior changes it might have made and aborts with a return code of SQLITE CONSTRAINT But no ROLLBACK is executed so changes from prior commands within the same transaction are preserved This is the defaul
143. ave the same sequence as the columns in the data grid you have selected When pasting data into Navicat you can replace the contents of current records and append the clipboard data into the table To replace the contents of current records in a table you must select the cells in the data grid whose contents must be replaced by the data in the clipboard Just simply press CTRL V or right click and select the E Paste from the pop up menu Navicat will paste all the content in the clipboard into the selected cell The paste action cannot be undone if you do not enable transaction Copy Records as Insert Update Statements To copy records as Insert Update statement select the records and click Edit gt Copy As gt Insert Statement or Update Statement from the menu Then you can paste the statements in any editor Copy Field Name To copy field names as tab separated values select the columns data and choose Edit gt Copy As gt Tab Separated Values Field Name only from the menu If you want to copy data only or both field names and data you can choose Tab Separated Values Data only or Tab Separated Values Field Name and Data respectively Save Data as a File You can save the data in the table grid to a file Simply right click a cell and choose Save Data As Enter the file name and file extension in the Save As dialog Note Not available when multiple selection sorting Finding Replacing Records Sorting Records Server
144. bar caption Show text on toolbar buttons in the main window Otherwise only buttons will be presented Use big icons for main toolbar Use large icons on toolbar buttons in the main window Font Grid Font Define the font and its size used by grid in Table Viewer Editor Font Define the font and its size used by editors Console Font Define the font and its size used in Console 295 ER Diagram Font Define the font and its size used in ER diagram Color Grid Colors Define the background colors of the table grid Use three colors Display the table grid background by using three different colors respectively for viewing data clearly Text Colors This color settings allows you to format your SQL queries in SQL Editor with colored syntax highlighting for your SQL statements to improve readability Set font colors of the SQL Editor uses to mark out different text fragments Common Keywords Comments Strings and Numbers Just simply click on the color boxes and choose your desired color from the Color Selection dialog window Main Window Show table hint While you roll the mouse pointer over a table within the Object List pane you could get a popup hint giving details about the table structure Show objects in Connection pane Display database objects using the tree structure in the Connection pane To expand a node simply double click the node Hint Reopen the database schema to take effect
145. base Name Define the name of the database Encoding Define the encoding for the database If omitted the default is the encoding of the template database Owner Define the owner for the database If omitted defaults to the user executing the command Only superusers may create database owned by users other than themselves Template Create the database from a template database Note It is essential that the source database be idle no data altering transactions in progress for the duration of the copying operation CREATE DATABASE will check that no session other than itself is connected to the source database at the start of the operation but this does not guarantee that changes cannot be made while the copy proceeds which would result in an inconsistent copied database Therefore it is recommended that databases used as templates be treated as read only Tablespace Define the tablespace for the database If omitted defaults to pg_default PostgreSQL Debugger Available only in Full Version Navicat provides PostgreSQL debugger for debugging PostgreSQL PL pgSQL functions 91 File View Run Window Help Run Step Over Step In t Step Out W Stop Call Stack public TEM public TEM QQ 4 i DECLARE a intz BEGIN a add 2 2 HOS OA p Ga a a add 2 2 return a END Name Value a 4 Log Breakpoints Debug Start Debug Initialize Debug On Run Procedure public TEM NOTICE
146. be created along with a label and border The Layout tab allows you to control drag and drop behavior A label and border are created for each data aware component by default You can turn the label and the border off control the color of the label or border and control the font of the label and data aware component from this tab Once you ve set the drag and drop behavior it will be retained for future design sessions Data Tree Create Al Tabular C Labels Grid Font A Fields for plOrders Fields C Grid Font A Mame Addri Addr2 Company ECity Company im Action Club Contact Stri Z Country 5 CustNo_2 EFAX ZLastinvoiceDate lt Data Layout Data Layout Align or Space Toolbar This toolbar will assist in positioning components relative to one another and relative to the band in which they appear I Align Left Align a group of components with the leftmost position of the component that was selected first Align Middle Center a group of components based on the horizontal center of the component that was first selected Sl Align Right Align a group of components with the rightmost position of the component that was selected first T Align Top Align a group of components with the topmost position of the component that was selected first t Align Center Align a group of components based on the vertical center of the component that was first selected a Align B
147. before the operator class is created Click aS gt Operator Class to open an object list for Operator Class Note Two operator classes in the same schema can have the same name only if they are for different index methods The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later 119 General Properties Owner The owner of the operator class function Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later Schema of Data Type and Data Type The column data type that this operator class is for Index method The name of the index method this operator class Is for Schema of Storage Type and Storage type The data type actually stored in the index Normally this is the same as the column data type but some index methods GIN and GiST for now allow it to be different The STORAGE clause must be omitted unless the index method allows a different type to be used Operator family The name of the existing operator family to add this operator class to If not specified a family named the same as the operator class is used creating it if it doesn t already exist Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 3 or later Default operator class With this option selected the operator class will become the default operator class for its data type At most one operator class can be the default for a specific data type and index method Operators Strategy number The index method s strategy number for an operator associated with the operator
148. beginning and ending at a specific date and time Conceptually this is similar to the idea of the Windows Task Scheduler Click E to open an object list for Event Definition Definition consists of a valid SQL statement This can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT or it can be a compound statement written using BEGIN and END Compound statements can contain declarations loops and other control structure statements Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Definer Specify the user account to be used when checking access privileges at event execution time The default DEFINER value is the user who executes the CREATE EVENT statement This is the same as DEFINER CURRENT_USER If a user value is given it should be a MySQL account in user_name host_name format the same format used in the GRANT statement The user_name and host_name values both are required STATUS You can create an event but keep it from being active using the DISABLE keyword Alternatively you may use ENABLE to make explicit the default status which is active ON COMPLETION Normally once an event has expired it is immediately dropped You can override this behavior by specifying ON COMPLETION PRESERVE Using ON COMPLETION NOT PRESERVE merely makes the default non persistent behavior explicit Schedule AT AT timestamp is used for a one time event It specifies that t
149. being formatted is always rounded to as many decimal places as there are digit placeholders 0 or to the right of the decimal point If the format contains no decimal point the value being formatted is rounded to the nearest whole number If the number being formatted has more digits to the left of the decimal separator than there are digit placeholders to the left of the character in the format string the extra digits are output before the first digit placeholder The following table shows the effect of various format strings Note extra digit to left of decimal still appears Note extra zero field will always show two decimal places 00 00 01 Note extra Os to right of decimal point and rounding to two decimal places To allow different formats for positive negative and zero values the format string can contain between one and three sections separated by semicolons One section The format string applies to all values Two sections The first section applies to positive values and zeros and the second section applies to negative values Three sections The first section applies to positive values the second applies to negative values and the third applies to zeros If the section for negative values or the section for zero values is empty that is if there is nothing between the semicolons that delimit the section the section for positive values is used instead lf the section for positive values is em
150. bpartition Values For range partitioning each partition must include a VALUES LESS THAN clause for list partitioning you must specify a VALUES IN clause for each partition This is used to determine which rows are to be stored in this partition 42 Tablespace Designate a tablespace for the partition Used for Falcon only Node Group Set the Node Group Comment Enter the comment for the partition MySQL MariaDB Views Views including updatable views are implemented in MySQL Server 5 0 and available in binary releases from 5 0 1 and up Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of relations tables as if it were a single table and limiting their access to just that Views can also be used to restrict access to rows a subset of a particular table For access control to columns you can also use the sophisticated privilege system in MySQL Server Click le to open an object list for View You can create a view shortcut by right click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without activating the main Navicat Button Description S O LELE i Preview the result of the view Explain Show the Query Plan of the view Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by sel
151. cal fields right click a table and select the Open Table Quick from the pop up menu Faster performance for opening the graphical table as BLOB fields images will not be loaded until you click on the cell If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table use Open Table You can create a table shortcut by right click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data directly without activating the main Navicat To empty a table right click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop up menu Note SQL Azure does not support the Storage and Comment tab SQL Server Table Fields In the Fields tab just simply click a field for editing A right click displays the pop up menu or using the field toolbar you can create new and drop the selected field To search a field name choose Edit gt Find or press CTRL F Button Description O Add Field Add a field to the table oF i Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field Note Only available when creating a new table Delete Field Delete the selected field P Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key Move Up Move Move the selected field up down Down Note Only available when creating a new table Use the Name edit box to set the field name Note that the name of the field must be unique amon
152. cat will predict field tyoes when you design fields in tables Hint Restart Navicat to take effect Miscellaneous Options Process Priority Priority indicates the priority used when scheduling the thread Adjust the priority higher or lower as needed Files Location You can change the folder for different types of files By default most of the files are stored in Settings Location However some files are located in the profiles directory and all the log files are stored in the logs directory File Association Available only in Full Version File associations are what the Navicat uses to open its saved files with Navicat For example a npt file Data Transfer profile will open with Data Transfer windows and a npi Import Wizard profile will open by default with Import Wizard Note In Vista or above you need to click File Association button to open the list In XP or below file association is listed in here External Editor Choose the file path of an external editor for opening queries Activation amp Updater Check for updates on startup Check this option to allow Navicat checks for new version when it starts Proxy 301 Use Proxy Check this option to use proxy for the activation process and enter Host Port User Name and Password OCI Available only for Oracle OCI library oci dll Choose the Oracle Client Oracle Instant Client folder that includes the OCI library oci dll for Basic TNS connecti
153. cation of the specified data You can significantly improve the performance of database queries and applications by creating well designed indexes to support your queries Indexes can reduce the amount of data that must be read to return the query result set Indexes can also enforce uniqueness on the rows in a table ensuring the data integrity of the table data Click ae gt Index to open an object list for Index Note SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab You can choose the index Type Nonclustered Clustered XML or Spatial Note XML index is supported from SQL Server 2005 or later Spatial index is supported from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure General Properties for Nonclustered and Clustered Indexes Unique A unique index is one in which no two rows are permitted to have the same index key value Table View Choose to create a table index or a view index Table name or View Name Select a table or a view 163 Columns Select the column or columns on which the index is based and the sorting order Included Columns only for Nonclustered Index Select the non key columns to be added to the leaf level of the nonclustered index Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Filter Properties for Nonclustered Index To create a filtered index specify which rows to include in the index Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure Advanced Properties for Nonclustered a
154. certain type of operation is performed Triggers can be defined to execute either before or after any INSERT UPDATE or DELETE operation either once per modified row or once per SQL statement In the Triggers tab just simply click a trigger field for editing By using the trigger toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected trigger field Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 4 or later Note To create a trigger on a table the user must have the TRIGGER privilege on the table Button Description 106 Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table Te Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name This must be distinct from the name of any other trigger for the same table Row trigger This specifies whether the trigger procedure should be fired once for every row affected by the trigger event or just once per SQL statement If unchecks FOR EACH STATEMENT is the default Fires Define the trigger action time It can be Before or After to indicate that the trigger activates before or after the statement that activated It Insert The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table Update The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified Delete The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table Update Of Fields Specify a list of columns The trigger will only fire if at least one of the listed columns is mentioned as a targ
155. ck this option if you want to compare auto increment values of tables Compare Partitions Check this option if you want to compare table partitions Compare Uniques Check this option if you want to compare uniques Compare Checks Check this option if you want to compare checks Compare Excludes Check this option if you want to compare exclude constraints Compare Collation Check this option if you want to compare collation of tables Compare Identity Last Value Check this option if you want to compare table identity last values Compare Views Check this option if you want to compare views Compare Functions Check this option if you want to compare functions Compare Events Check this option if you want to compare events Compare Definer Check this option if you want to compare definer 243 Compare Indexes Check this option if you want to compare indexes Compare Sequences Check this option if you want to compare sequences Compare Triggers Check this option if you want to compare triggers Compare Rules Check this option if you want to compare rules Compare Tablespace and Physical Attributes Check this option if you want to compare tablespace and physical attributes Compare Storage Check this option if you want to compare storage SQL for objects to be created Check this option to include all related SQL statements if new database objects will be created in the target
156. class Schema of operator and Operator name The operator associated with the operator class Recheck With this option selected the index is lossy for this operator and so the rows retrieved using the index must be rechecked to verify that they actually satisfy the qualification clause involving this operator Note Before PostgreSQL 8 4 the OPERATOR clause could include a RECHECK option This is no longer supported because whether an index operator is lossy is now determined on the fly at runtime This allows efficient handling of cases where an operator might or might not be lossy Functions 120 Support number The index method s support procedure number for a function associated with the operator class Schema of function and Function name The function that is an index method support procedure for the operator class PostgreSQL Sequences Sequence involves creating and initializing a new special single row table It is usually used to generate unique identifiers for rows of a table Click ci gt Sequence to open an object list for Sequence General Properties Owner The owner of the sequence function Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later Increment Specify which value is added to the current sequence value to create a new value A positive value will make an ascending sequence a negative one a descending sequence The default value is 1 Current value The starting value of the sequence Mini
157. connects through a Windows user account SQL Server validates the account name and password using the Windows principal token in the operating system This means that the user identity is confirmed by Windows SQL Server does not ask for the password and does not perform the identity validation Advanced Settings Settings Location When a new connection is being established Navicat will create a subfolder under the Settings Location Most files are stored within this subfolder Navicat Objects Server Types File Extensions Query All sql 26 Backup MySQL PostgreSQL SQLite compressed psc uncompressed psb and MariaDB Other files are located in the profiles directory To look for the path choose Tools gt Options gt Miscellaneous gt Profiles Location Other Files Server Types File Extensions 27 Data Synchronization Npd Structure Synchronization MySQL Nps Batch Job MySQL Npj Premium Cross Server Model File All ndm Virtual Grouping All vgroup json stores how the objects are categorized See also Log Files Auto Connect With this option on Navicat automatically open connection with the registered database at application startup MySQL and MariaDB Connections Encoding Choose a codepage to communicate with MySQL Server while MySQL character set not being employed Keepalive Interval sec This option allows you to keep the connection with the server alive by p
158. cord move to the first record Previous Record move one record back if there is one from the current record Next Record move one record ahead Last Record move to the last record Note The SQL statement shows under the Record Navigation Bar indicates any statement has just been executed Page Navigation Bar button Description SSS Fe Fist Page moveo tretge O O OOOO e Previous Page move wo provouspae New Pase movetonexpages OOOO CES om Em c Use the Limit Record Setting button to enter to the edit mode Limit Records records per page Check this option if you want to limit the number of records showed on each page Otherwise all records will be displayed in one single page And set the records per page value in the edit field The number representing the number of records showed per page Note This setting mode will take effect on current table only To adjust the global settings see Options t C 98 Limit Records 00 records per page E S SELECT FROM customer LIMIT 0 1000 Record 1 of 599 in page 1 Record a of b in page c The Record Page Indicator displays the numbers representing the selected record and page 187 a the selected record b number of records in the current page c the current page Editing Records The navigation bar allows you to switch the records quickly insert update or delete records View data as a grid is most helpful for entering ne
159. ct Type and specify the Name Clause Query Specify a subquery that is added to the end of the SELECT statement for the table If you specify a WHERE clause in the subquery you can restrict the rows that are selected Remap Data Remap Data mws Dessipton SSS Package Schema The schema of the package Package Name The name of the package Package Function A PL SQL package function which is called to modify the data for the specified column Remap DataFiles Specify a remapping to be applied to objects as they are processed in the specified job Enter the Source DataFile and Target DataFile Remap Objects 53 Remap Schemas Specify a remapping to be applied to schemas as they are processed in the specified job Enter the Source schema and choose the Target schema Remap TableSpaces Specify a remapping to be applied to tablespaces as they are processed in the specified job Enter the Source TableSpace and choose the Target TableSpace Remap Tables Specify a remapping to be applied to tables as they are processed in the specified job Enter the Source Table and choose the Target Table Advanced Properties Thread Number The maximum number of worker processes that can be used for the job Reuse DataFiles Check this box to reuse existing datafiles for tablespace creation Skip Unusable Indexes Check this box to skip loading tables that have indexes that were set to the Index Unusable state by either the system
160. ct name to Check this option if you require convert object names to Lower case or Upper case during the process Insert records Check this option if you require all records to be transferred to the destination database and or schema Lock target tables Lock the tables in the target database and or schema during the data transfer process Use transaction Check this option if you use transaction during the data transfer process Use complete insert statements Insert records using complete insert syntax Example INSERT INTO users ID Number User Name User Age VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 INSERT INTO users ID Number User Name User Age VALUES 2 Johnson Ryne 56 INSERT INTO users ID Number User Name User Age VALUES 0 katherine 23 Use extended insert statements Insert records using extended insert syntax Example INSERT INTO users VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 2 Johnson Ryne 56 0 Katherine 23 Use delayed insert statements Insert records using DELAYED insert SQL statements Example INSERT DELAYED INTO users VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 INSERT DELAYED INTO users VALUES 2 Johnson Ryne 56 INSERT DELAYED INTO users VALUES 0 katherine 23 240 Run multiple insert statements Check this option if you want to run multiple inser
161. ctionality would be skipped Editing data in Raw Mode provides an ease and direct method to apply server built in function To access the Raw Mode function just simply select View gt Raw Mode from the menu Note Available only for MySQL PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and MariaDB customerid store_id 4 4 2 1 t 3 tT 4 J first_name MARY PATRICIA CONCAT LIN BARBARA 194 DA last_name SMITH JOHNSON WILLIAMS JONES Formatting Table Grid Use the following methods to format the table grid Move Columns 1 Click on the column header and hold down the left mouse button 2 Move the pointer until a double black line appears in the desired location 3 Release the mouse and the column will move customerid store id first_name J MaRy PATRICIA LINDA BARBARA Freeze Selected Column If there are many columns in the table and you want to freeze one or more columns to identify the record Just simply right click the column you want to freeze and select Display gt Freeze Selected Column or select View gt Freeze Selected Column from the menu The frozen column s will move to the leftmost position in the table grid This action will locks the frozen column s preventing them from being edited To unfreeze the columns just simply right click anywhere on the table grid and select Display gt Unfreeze Columns or select View gt Unfreez
162. ctory Choose the log file directory Log File Name Enter the name of the log file Oracle Debugger Available only in Full Version Navicat provides Oracle PL SQL debugger for debugging Oracle functions procedures packages and queries To re arrange the workspace items click on any pane in the workspace then hold down your cursor and drag the pane to the desired area and release the cursor The selected pane will appear in its new position Hint AS you drag a pane to its new position a Pane Sticker will appear and a bright blue indicator will mark the insertion point 55 Eaj a Oracle Debugger File View Run Window Help Pm Run Step Over t Step In t Step Out Step End W Stop Call Stack 3 5Y5 5UBPTXT2 SYS SUBPTAT2 Line 11 1 CREATE OR REPLACE os procedure subptxt name varchar2 subnmame va dbname yvarchar2 db tat in out varchar Status diutil ub4 begin EAN dintil subptXt mame subname usr dbname dl Mananik Mane Wate if us lt gt diutil s ok then Status diutil s subpNotFound then tat 5 s subpNotFound S D gt diutil s stubTooLong th s stubTooLong omat Data E a ee logic then 15 meee S55 s logic Variable Name Value 16 E Status diutil s notiInPackage tl eae 17 txt 2 ee i 18 else tat S55 3 other dbowner 19 and if name 20 end if i status D Log 23 Run Procedure SYS SUBPTXT2 A Breakpoint has
163. cture Synchronization before Data Synchronization The messages indicate the running process success or failure are saved in file LogSynchronize txt To open a saved profile select the profile and click Load button or double click it in Profiles tab Note SQL Server 2000 does not support For Oracle server BLOB CLOB NCLOB LONG and LONG RAW data are skipped during the data synchronization process TIMESTAMP primary key cannot synchronize insert update with Database Link to 9i server RAW primary key cannot synchronize insert update delete with Database Link to any server without error Navicat Premium and Navicat for MySQL support synchronize between MySQL and MariaDB 241 General Settings for Data Synchronization Source Target Define connection database and or schema for the source and target Note For Oracle server you need to create Public Private Database Link to the target Oracle database before Source Table Target Table Only tables which contain identical table names between the source and target are mapped in the list by default If you do not want some tables to be synchronized disable them manually from the drop down list Hint You can preview the outcome before execution Advanced Settings for Data Synchronization Use Transaction Rollback all data when error occurs Show synchronization detail Check this option if you want to list the details process in Message Log tab during the synchronization
164. d Features View Viewer View Viewer displays the view data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details SQLite Indexes Index provides a faster access path to table data It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL statement execution on that table Click to open an object list for Index General Properties Type The types of the index Normal A normal index does not impose restrictions on the column values An unique index indicates that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the key columns Table name The table that contains the index 140 Name To define the field Collate To define a collating sequence used for text entries in that column The default collating sequence is the collating sequence defined for that column BINARY Compare string data using memcmp regardless of text encoding NOCASE The same as binary except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower case equivalents before the comparison is performed Note that only ASCII characters are case folded SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the size of the tables required RTRIM The same as binary except that trailing space characters are ignored Note Support in SQLite 3 Sort Order To indicate sort order ascending ASC or descending DESC SQLite Triggers Triggers are database operatio
165. d find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Parameter Define function parameter Return type schema and Return Type The return type of the function Table Columns Enter the table columns if the return type is set to TABLE 110 Advanced Properties Owner The owner of the function Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later Language The name of the language that the function is implemented in May be SQL C internal or the name of a user defined procedural language For backward compatibility the name may be enclosed by single quotes Volatility These attributes inform the query optimizer about the behavior of the function At most one choice may be specified If none of these appear VOLATILE is the default assumption IMMUTABLE The function cannot modify the database and always returns the same result when given the same argument values that is it does not do database lookups or otherwise use information not directly present in its argument list If this option is given any call of the function with all constant arguments can be immediately replaced with the function value STABLE The function cannot modify the database and that within a single table scan it will consistently return the same result for the same argument values but that its result could change across SQL statements This is the appropriate selection for functions whose results depend on database lookups parame
166. d foreign key field Button Description o amp Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table amp Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key Use the Referenced Schema Referenced Table and Referenced Constraint drop down lists to select a foreign schema table and constraint respectively To include field s to the key just simply double click the Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing The On Delete drop down list defines the type of the actions to be taken No Action This is the default action Referenced key values will not be updated or deleted CASCADE Delete any rows referencing the deleted row or update the value of the referencing column to the new value of the referenced column respectively SET NULL Set the referencing column s to null Enable You can choose whether to enable disable the foreign key constraint by checking unchecking the box Related topic Foreign Keys Data Selection Oracle Table Uniques Unique constraints ensure that the data contained in a column or a group of columns is unique with respect to all the rows in the table In the Uniques tab just simply click an unique field for editing By using the toolbar below allowing you to create new edit and delete the selected unique field 62 Button Description S Add Unique Add an unique to the table Delete Unique Delete the selec
167. d materials and online or electronic documentation e Unregistered version Trial version or Demo version means an unregistered copy of the SOFTWARE UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE which may be used by the USER for evaluation purposes for a period of fourteen 14 days following the initial installation of the UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE At the end of the trial period TRIAL PERIOD the USER must either register the SOFTWARE or remove it from his system The UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE may be freely copied and distributed to other users for their evaluation f Navicat Essentials means a version of the Software so identified to be used for commercial purpose 2 License Grants The licenses granted in this Section 2 are subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this EULA a Subject to Section 2 b you may install and use the Software on a single computer OR install and store the Software on a storage device such as a network server used only to install the Software on your other 13 computers over an internal network provided you have a license for each separate computer on which the Software is installed and run Except as otherwise provided in Section 2 b a license for the Software may not be shared installed or used concurrently on different computers b In addition to the single copy of the Software permitted in Section 2 a the primary user of the computer on which the Software is installed may make a second copy of the Software
168. d once for every row affected by the trigger event or just once per SQL statement If unchecks FOR EACH STATEMENT is the default Fires Define the trigger action time It can be Before or After to indicate that the trigger activates before or after the statement that activated it Insert The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table Update The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified Delete The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table Update Of Fields Specify a list of columns The trigger will only fire if at least one of the listed columns is mentioned as a target of the UPDATE command Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later 102 When Clause Specify a Boolean WHEN condition which will be tested to see whether the trigger should be fired Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 0 or later Trigger Function Schema and Trigger Function A user supplied function that is declared as taking no arguments and returning type trigger which is executed when the trigger fires Arguments An optional comma separated list of arguments to be provided to the function when the trigger is executed The arguments are literal string constants Simple names and numeric constants may be written here too but they will all be converted to strings Please check the description of the implementation language of the trigger function about how the trigger arguments are accessible within
169. d select Create Open Materialized View Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your materialized view directly without activating the main Navicat To refresh and completely replace the contents of a materialized view right click it in the Object List pane and select Refresh Materialized View With gt Data or No Data from the pop up menu Button oes OOS O Preview the result of the materialized view z Explain Show the Query Plan of the materialized view Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or In a New Tab View Builder Available only in Full Version View Builder allows you to build views visually It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL See Query Builder for details Definition You can edit the view definition as SQL statement SELECT statement it implements 117 Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Advanced Properties Owner The owner of the materialized view Tablespace The name of the tablespace in which the new materialized view is to be created Fill Factor The fillfactor for a view is a percentage between 10 and 100 100 complete packing is the default With D
170. d select Set to Empty String To set Null value for the cell right click the selected cell and select Set to NULL To edit the text field record just simply click Show Memo In Grid from the View menu 188 Note Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL and MariaDB Custo Company Addr 1221 Kaual Dive Shoppe WIDEMEMOQ 1231 Unisco WIDEMEMOQ 1351 Sight Diver WIDEMEMQ 1354 Cayman Divers World Unlim WIDEMEMQ Hint To view edit the text field record in an ease way see Memo Editor To view images in the grid just simply click Show Image In Grid from the View menu Note Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB id image ia g 2 EE 3 imal Hint To view edit the image in an ease way see Image Editor To edit a Date Time record just simply click or press CTRL ENTER to open the editor for editing Choose enter the desired data The editor used in cell is determined by the field type assigned to the column Note Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB pate Time _DateTime Timestamp 4 January 2013 4 January 2013 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu i 31 1 2 3 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 30 31 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 14 15 16 17 EPF 76 2 2 3 24 el a 2 29 3 31 n 28 29 30 31 4 7 B 9 Cancel 3 4 5 6 7 C Today 1 16 2013 C Today 1 16 2013 OK Cancel To edit an Enum record just simply choose the record from the drop down list
171. d when connecting to an encrypted SQLite database To detach a database right click it in the Connection pane and choose Detach Database 131 If you want to encrypt or decrypt a database simply right click it in the Connection pane and choose Encrypt Database or Decrypt Database A special table named sqlite_master stores the complete database schema To view the sqlite_master table right click the database and select View Master Table from the pop up menu SQLite Tables Relational databases use tables to store data All operations on data are done on the tables themselves or produce another table as the result A table is a set of rows and columns and their intersections are fields From a general perspective columns within a table describe the name and type of data that will be found by row for that column s fields Rows within a table represent records composed of fields that are described from left to right by their corresponding column s name and type Each field in a row is implicitly correlated with each other field in that row Click E to open an object list for Table When open a table with graphical fields right click a table and select the Open Table Quick from the pop up menu Faster performance for opening the graphical table as BLOB fields images will not be loaded until you click on the cell If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table use Open Table You can create a table sh
172. dator Validator function is the name of a previously registered function that will be called when a new function in the language is created to validate the new function If no validator function is specified then a new function will not be checked when it is created The validator function must take one argument of type oid which will be the OID of the to be created function and will typically return void A validator function would typically inspect the function body for syntactical correctness but it can also look at other properties of the function for example if the language cannot handle certain argument types To signal an error the validator function should use the ereport function The return value of the function is ignored Trusted Specify that the call handler for the language is safe that is it does not offer an unprivileged user any functionality to bypass access restrictions If this key word is omitted when registering the language only users with the PostgreSQL superuser privilege can use this language to create new functions SQLite Objects To start working with the server objects you should create and open a connection You can attach a database right click the opened connection and choose Attach Database and enter the following information Database File Set the file path for a database Database Name Enter the database name which displays in Navicat Encrypted Enable this option and provide Passwor
173. dd a field to the table Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field Note Only available when creating a new table et Delete Field Delete the selected field Move Up Move Move the selected field up down Down Note Only available when creating a new table To add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields you can right click and select the Duplicate Field from the pop up menu Use the Name edit box to set the field name Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names in the table The Type drop down list defines the type of the field data See Oracle Built in Datatypes for details Use the Length edit box to define the precision total number of digits of the field and use Scale edit box to define the scale number of digits to the right of the decimal point for numeric column Note Be careful when shortening the field length as it might result in data loss Field s Properties 66 Note The following options depend on the field type you are chosen Leading Field Precision Set the number of digits in the leading field Fractional Seconds Precision Set the number of digits in the fractional part of the SECOND datetime field Year Precision Set the number of digits in the year Unit Set the unit either in BYTE or CHAR Object Schema Set the object schema for the field type Object Type Set the object type for the field External Propertie
174. e Execute the query and the Input Parameter Dialog is provided for you to enter the desired data you wish to search Debugging Oracle Query Available only in Full Version To debug the Oracle query click Debug on the toolbar to launch the Oracle Debugger Enter the parameter s if the query has input parameter s 207 Model Available only in Navicat Premium and Enterprise Version Model is a powerful tool for creating and manipulating physical database models Click E to open an object list for Model Some of key features are listed here e Create and manipulate a physical model graphically e Reverse engineer a database schema table s or view s to a physical model e Forward engineer a physical model to a sql file or database schema e Create and edit table structures directly To create a model click ly New Model from the object list toolbar The New Model window will pop up for you to select the target Database and Version Hint Model files ndm are saved under the Profiles Location To open the folder right click the model file and choose Open Containing Folder If the model is synchronized to Navicat Cloud it is stored in the Cloud Model Sidebar In the model s sidebars all objects of your model diagram s their properties and action history are listed The sidebars consist of the following components e Explorer e History e Properties e Overview Model Explorer Pane The Explorer pane has two t
175. e A sequence value providing additional ordering information should be recorded in the materialized view log Fields Choose the fields whose values you want to be recorded in the materialized view log for all rows that are changed Oracle Packages Packages are encapsulated collections of related procedures stored functions and other program objects stored together in the database Package bodies specified subsequently defines these objects An package consists of two parts a specification and a body Click aS gt Package to open an object list for Package The Code Outline window displays information about the package package body including function procedure parameter code body etc To show the Code Outline window simply choose View gt Code Outline Note Available only in Full Version Button Description 79 FE Collapse the selected item Toggle sorting by position Package s Definition Enter the package s definition After saving the package you can edit the Package Body Just click New Package Body or Design Package Body to open the Package Body Designer Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Package Body s Definition Enter the package body s definition To edit the Package Specification click T Design Package Specification to open the Package Designer Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out mo
176. e Auto Increment Value Row Format Modified Date Created Date Check Time Index Length Y Data Length Max Data Length 2 e wa Report Backup Schedule Model Objects GP EmployeePayHistory Advent sakila Model Value film_category sakila 1423 InnoDB Compact 2014 12 22 13 14 46 16 00 KB 16 384 64 00 KB 65 536 0 bytes 0 1552 KB Table Typ InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB InnoDB O Oikia A Project DT 0052 Members Activity Mary Brown updated connection Testing Server 02 Mary Brown added model Company Mary Brown removed model Company PH Adam Smith updated model i a AdventureWorks Katherine Marriott added oe model SOL_3schemas AdventureWorks Company HR Katherine Marriott removed model Order Model Adam Smith added model Order Model PS Adam Smith added query S order _list Mary Brown updated connection Testing Server 02 1 object s selected So Project DT 0052 EN Testing Server 02 User root Database sakila Navicat Main Toolbar Navicat Main Toolbar allows you to access basic objects and features such as connections users tables backup schedule and more To use small icons or hide the caption simply right click the toolbar and disable Use Big Icons or Show Caption Connection Connection pane is the basic way to navigate with connections databases and database objects I
177. e Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB SQL Azure does not support Process List Display a list of processes from all servers selected To stop the selected process click End Process button Auto refresh If you want to take action on auto refreshing the server in assigned seconds choose View gt Set Auto Refresh Time and enter an auto refresh value To disable auto refresh feature choose View gt Auto Refresh Note Effect will take once you assign the value The process list provides the following information depends on the database type you are chosen MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB e Server name that is given while setting the connection e Process ID on the server e Serial number of the process e Current user who log in to the server e Host from which the user is connected e Database that the user is currently used e Last command that was issued by the user e Time state and info of the process e CPU Time and state of the process Variables Display the list of all server variables and their values 290 Note Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL and MariaDB Hint To edit variable value in MySQL and Oracle servers click L or press CTRL ENTER to open editor for editing The value in PostgreSQL server cannot be edited here Those variables can be set using the SET statement by editing the postgresql conf configuration file Status Display
178. e Columns from the menu Set Display Format The Set Display Format Dialog is provided for you to customize format applied to exported data on the selected column Just simply right click the column you want to edit its format and select Display gt Set Display Format or select View gt Set Display Format from the menu Edit the format style to adjust the result format in the way you need For example dd mm yyyy Hint This action applies on the selected column only To adjust the global settings see Options Set Column Width Click right border at top of column and drag either left or right Double click right border at top of column to obtain the best fit for the column Right click the column you want to set the column width with and select Display gt Set Column Width or select View gt Set Column Width from the menu Specify width in the Set Column Width Dialog The default value is 120 Hint The result only applies on the selected column To adjust the global settings see Options 195 Set Row Height Right click anywhere on the table grid and select Display gt Set Row Height or select View gt Set Row Height from the menu Specify row height in the Set Row Height Dialog The default value is 17 Hint This action applies on the current table grid only To adjust the global settings see Options Show Hide Columns If there are many columns in the table and you want to hide some of them from the table grid Just s
179. e at both stages of access control MySQL MariaDB User Designer General Properties User name Set name for user Host A host name where the database is situated or the IP address of the server Password Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Advanced Properties Max queries per hour Max updates per hour Max connections per hour These options limit the number of queries updates and logins a user can perform during any given one hour period If they are set as 0 the default this means that there is no limitation for that user Max user connections This option limits the maximum number of simultaneous connections that the account can make If it is set as O the 2 0 default the max_user_connections system variable determines the number of simultaneous connections for the account Use OLD PASSWORD encryption The password hashing mechanism was updated in MySQL 4 1 to provide better security and to reduce the risk of passwords being intercepted However this new mechanism is understood only by MySQL 4 1 and newer servers and clients which can result in some compatibility problems A 4 1 or newer client can connect to a pre 4 1 server because the client understands both the old and new password hashing mechanisms However a pre 4 1 client that attempts to connect to a 4 1 or newer server may run into difficulties Enable this option if you wish to maintain backward compatibility with pre
180. e be restored to the state it was in as of the date and time Marked transaction only for Transaction Log backup Specify recovery to a specified recovery point Include marked transaction only for Transaction Log backup The specified transaction is included in the recovery but it is committed only if it was originally committed when the transaction was actually generated General Properties for Restore from File Restore to database Select the database to restore Source of backup set To add a Backup Device or file to the list click the Add device bution Latest possible Choose this option if do not have the restore point Specific time Specify that the database be restored to the state it was in as of the date and time 150 Marked transaction Specify recovery to a specified recovery point Include marked transaction The specified transaction is included in the recovery but it is committed only if it was originally committed when the transaction was actually generated Restore plan Select the database backup files in the list Advanced Properties Restore database files to Specify that the data or log file should be moved by restoring it to the location specified in Restore To WITH REPLACE Specify that SQL Server should create the specified database and its related files even if another database already exists with the same name WITH RESTRICTED_USER Restrict access for the newly restored da
181. e current identity value Note SQL Azure does not support Not For Replication Values are not incremented in identity columns when replication agents perform inserts Note SQL Azure does not support Change Tracking Enabled Specify change tracking is enabled for the table Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Track Columns Updated Specify the Database Engine tracks which change tracked columns were updated 159 Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later SQL Server Table Storage On Filegroup Option Description Filegroup Choose a filegroup that storing the table Text Image Filegroup Choose a filegroup for storing text ntext image xml varchar max nvarchar max varbinary max and CLR user defined type columns File Stream Filegroup Choose a filegroup for FILESTREAM data Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later On Partition Scheme Option Description Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme that storing the table Partition Column Choose a partition column name File Stream Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme for FILESTREAM data Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Data Compression Specify the data compression option for the specified table partition number or range of partitions Choose the Type for the partition Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later SQL Server Views A view can be thought of as ei
182. e free form text describing the backup set Backup Type Full Backup Perform a full backup Differential Backup Specify that the database or file backup should consist only of the portions of the database or file changed since the last full backup Transaction Log Backup Specify a backup of the transaction log only Note Support from SQL Server 2012 or later and SQL Azure Copy only Specify that the backup is a copy only backup which does not affect the normal sequence of backups New Media Set Create a new media set for the backup To add a Backup Device or file to the list click the Add device button Existing Media Set Choose an existing media set for the backup File and Filegroups Properties for Full and Differential Backups 148 Choose the Backup Components Full Database Backup Partial Backup or Specify files and filegroups Advanced Properties Expire After Days Specify the number of days that must elapse before this backup media set can be overwritten Expire On Specify when the backup set expires and can be overwritten Password Set the password for the backup set Format media set Specify that a new media set be created New Name The name of the new media set Description Specify the free form text description of the media set Overwrite all backups Specify that all backup sets should be overwritten but preserves the media header Check media name and backup set expirat
183. e main menu System Requirements System Requirements for Windows e Microsoft Windows XP SP3 Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows 10 Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 e 32 bit or 64 bit systems System Requirements for Mac OS X e Mac OS X 10 7 Lion 10 8 Mountain Lion 10 9 Mavericks 10 10 Yosemite 10 11 El Capitan e Intel CPU System Requirements for Linux e Compatible with i386 PC e Supports 32 bit and 64 bit Linux platform e Supports Linux kernel version 2 2 or higher e Supports Glibc 2 4 or above e Supports GNOME and KDE Note You need to install all 32 bit libraries before working on 64 bit Linux Registration To make it economic and efficient for you to purchase our products over 95 of customers order Navicat via our Online Shop using major Credit Cards MasterCard Visa Euro card JCB and American Express All Online orders are processed by PayPal and WorldPay The VeriSign Certificate for SSL transactions provided will ensure you a secured Online transactions If you have ordered Navicat software and would like to review your order information or if you have questions about ordering payments or shipping procedures please contact our Navicat Sales Department After purchase you will obtain a Registration Key to activate your licensed Navicat by e mail within 24 hours after we received your order Please make sure to enter a valid e mail address in your order If you have not received the k
184. e of the tables required RTRIM The same as binary except that trailing soace characters are ignored Note Support in SQLite 3 Sort Order To indicate sort order ascending ASC or descending DESC SQLite Table Checks A check constraint allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must satisfy a Boolean truth value expression In the Checks tab just simply click a check field for editing By using the check toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected check field Note Checks are supported from SQLite version 3 3 0 or later Button Description ooo Add Check Add a check to the table Delete Check Delete the selected check Use the Name edit box to set the check name 137 Check Set the condition for checking e g field _name1 gt 0 AND field_name2 gt field_namei in the Check edit box Definition Type in the definition for the check constraint SQLite Table Triggers A trigger is a database operation that is automatically performed when a specified database event occurs In the Triggers tab just simply click a trigger field for editing By using the trigger toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected trigger field Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger Name Set the trigger name Fires Determine when the trigger actions will be executed relative to the insertion modific
185. e selected role to be a member of this role Multiple roles can be granted Privileges To edit specific object privileges for role click Add Privilege to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object 2 Check the object to show the grid on the right panel 3 Inthe grid check Granted or Grant Option option against the privilege listed in Privilege to assign this role to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted SQL Server Security The SQL Server sa log in is a server level principal By default it is created when an instance is installed In SQL Server 2005 or above the default database of sa is master This is a change of behavior from earlier versions of SQL Server 2 8 By default the database includes a guest user when a database is created Permissions granted to the guest user are inherited by users who do not have a user account in the database The guest user cannot be dropped but it can be disabled by revoking its CONNECT permission The CONNECT permission can be revoked by executing REVOKE CONNECT FROM GUEST within any database other than master or tempdb In SQL Server the concept for permissions is using principals and securables Principals are the individuals groups and processes granted access to SQL Server Securables are the server database and objects the database contains Principals can be arranged in a hierarchy To easil
186. e specification or body and instruct the PL SQL compiler to generate and store the code for use by the PL SQL debugger Maintain XML Schema Compile To re compile an already registered XML schema This is useful for bringing a schema in an invalid state to a valid State Purge To remove the XML Schema completely from Oracle XML DB in Oracle 11g Maintain Tablespace Read Only To place the tablespace in transition read only mode In this state existing transactions can complete commit or roll back but no further DML operations are allowed to the tablespace except for rollback of existing transactions that previously modified blocks in the tablespace Read Write To indicate that write operations are allowed on a previously read only tablespace Online To take the tablespace online Offline To take the tablespace offline Normal To flush all blocks in all datafiles in the tablespace out of the system global area SGA Temporary Oracle database performs a checkpoint for all online datafiles in the tablespace but does not ensure that all files can be written Immediate Oracle database does not ensure that tablespace files are available and does not perform a checkpoint Coalesce To combine all contiguous free extents into larger contiguous extents for each datafile in the tablespace Shrink Space To reduce the amount of space the tablespace is taking This is valid only for temporary tablespaces in Oracle 1
187. ecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or In a New Tab View Builder Available only in Full Version View Builder allows you to build views visually It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL See Query Builder for details Definition You can edit the view definition as SQL statement SELECT statement it implements Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Advanced Properties Algorithm Undefined MySQL chooses which algorithm to use It prefers Merge over Temptable if possible because Merge is usually more efficient and because a view cannot be updatable if a temporary table is used Merge The text of a statement that refers to the view and the view definition are merged such that parts of the view definition replace corresponding parts of the statement Temptable The results from the view are retrieved into a temporary table which then is used to execute the 43 statement Definer The default Definer value is the user who executes the CREATE VIEW statement This is the same as DEFINER CURRENT USER If a user value is given it should be a MySQL account in user_name host_name format the same format used in the GRANT statement The user_name and host_name values both are required Security The SQL SECURITY characteristic determines which MySQL account to use when checking access privileges for the
188. ed for C language and internal functions and 100 units for functions in all other languages Larger values cause the planner to try to avoid evaluating the function more often than necessary Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later Estimated rows A positive number giving the estimated number of rows that the planner should expect the function to return This is only allowed when the function is declared to return a set Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later Configuration parameter The specified configuration parameter to be set to the specified value when the function is entered and then restored to its prior value when the function exits Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later Debug Available only in Full Version To debug the PL pgSQL function click J Debug Function on the toolbar to launch the PostgreSQL Debugger PostgreSQL Types Type registers a new data type for use in the current database If a schema name is given then the type is created in the specified schema Otherwise it is created in the current schema The type name must be distinct from the name of any existing type or domain in the same schema Because tables have associated data types the tyoe name must 125 also be distinct from the name of any existing table in the same schema Click wi gt Type to open an object list for Type Base types are those like int4 that are implemented below the level of the SQL language typically in a low lev
189. ed into the query result lt func gt Set the aggregate functions SUM MAN MIX AVG COUNT for each field lt Alias gt Change the output query field name Setting Criteria 201 To add a condition click the lt gt lt gt from the WHERE clause in the Syntax pane Click lt gt to choose the field from the list of all the table fields available in the query To define your own criteria type your values directly in the Edit Tab Clicking to set condition operator Setting Grouping Criteria You can set the conditions for grouping query records from the GROUP BY clause in the Syntax pane They are set in the same way as Setting criteria The conditions will be included into the HAVING statement of the current query Setting Sorting Criteria When you query your database schema you can sort the results by any field in an ascending or descending order by just adding ORDER BY at the end of your query In Query Builder you can set the way of sorting query records from the ORDER BY clause in the Syntax pane To change the sorting direction click on either ASC or DESC Setting Limit Criteria LIMIT clause is used to limit your query results to those that fall within a specified range You can use it to show the first X number of results or to show a range from X Y results It is phrased as Limit X Y and included at the end of your query X is the starting point remember the first record is 0 and Y is the dur
190. ed server roles to connect to the database but does not limit their number MULTI USER All users that have the appropriate permissions to connect to the database are allowed Encryption Enabled Check this option if you want to encrypt the database Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Advanced Properties SQL for SQL Server ANSI Null Default Check this option if you want to determines the default value as NULL 144 ANSI Nulls Enabled If this option is on all comparisons to a null value evaluate to UNKNOWN ANSI Padding Enabled If this option is on strings are padded to the same length before conversion or inserting to a varchar or nvarchar data type ANSI Warnings Enabled If this option is on errors or warnings are issued when conditions such as divide by zero occur or null values appear in aggregate functions Arithmetic Abort Enabled If this option is on a query is ended when an overflow or divide by zero error occurs during query execution Concatenate Null Yields Null If this option is on the result of a concatenation operation is NULL when either operand is NULL Numeric Round Abort If this option is on an error is generated when loss of precision occurs in an expression Quoted Identifiers Enabled If this option is on double quotation marks can be used to enclose delimited identifiers Recursive Triggers Enabled If this option is on Recursive firing of AFTER triggers is all
191. ee Editor Advanced Features Advanced Properties Encrypted Encrypt the entries in sys syscomments that contain the text of the CREATE VIEW statement Note SQL Azure does not support Schema Bound Bind the view to the schema of the underlying table or tables View Metadata Specify that the instance of SQL Server will return to the DB Library ODBC and OLE DB APIs the metadata information about the view instead of the base table or tables when browse mode metadata is being requested for a query that references the view With Check Option Force all data modification statements executed against the view to follow the criteria set within select_statement View Viewer View Viewer displays the view data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details SQL Server Functions Procedures A user defined function which is a Transact SQL or common language runtime CLR routine that accepts parameters performs an action such as a complex calculation and returns the result of that action as a value The return value can either be a scalar single value or a table Click E to open an object list for Function 161 Stored procedures are similar to procedures in other programming languages in that they can e Accept input parameters and return multiple values in the form of output parameters to the calling procedure or batch e Contain programming statements that perform operati
192. el language such as C They generally correspond to what are often Known as abstract data types PostgreSQL can only operate on such types through functions provided by the user and only understands the behavior of such types to the extent that the user describes them Base types are further subdivided into scalar and array types For each scalar type a corresponding array type is automatically created that can hold variable size arrays of that scalar type Composite types or row types are created whenever the user creates a table it s also possible to define a stand alone composite type with no associated table A composite type is simply a list of base types with associated field names A value of a composite type is a row or record of field values The user can access the component fields from SQL queries Enumerated Enum types are data types that are comprised of a static predefined set of values with a specific order They are equivalent to the enum types in a number of programming languages An example of an enum type might be the days of the week or a set of status values for a piece of data Range types are data types representing a range of values of some element type called the range s subtype Note Enum Type was added in PostgreSQL 8 3 Range Type was added in PostgrerSQL 9 2 General Properties for Base Type Input Schema and Input The function that converts data from the type s external textual form to its internal for
193. eld blank Host Name IP Address A host name where the database is situated or the IP address of the server Port A TCP IP port for connecting to the database server Initial Database The initial database to which user connects when making connection User Name User name for connecting to the database server Password Password for connecting to the server SQLite Connection You can choose the Type of the SQLite database and specify the file path Existing Database File Connect an existing database in the Database File New SQLite 3 Create a new SQLite 3 database in the Database File 25 New SQLite 2 Create a new SQLite 2 database in the Database File Database File Specify the initial database file If the HTTP Tunnel is enabled you need to enter an absolute file path of the database file in your web server User Name User name for connecting to an existing database Password Password for connecting to an existing database SQL Server Connection Host Name IP Address A host name where the database is situated or the IP address of the server Authentication SQL Server uses two ways to validate connections to SQL Server databases SQL Server Authentication and Windows Authentication SQL Server SQL Server Authentication uses login records to validate the connection Users must Authentication provide their server login User Name and Password Windows Authentication When a user
194. em To delete the objects from the selected jobs list remove them in the same way You are allowed to run profiles from different servers in a single batch job schedule To rearrange the sequence of the selected jobs use Move Up or Move Down buttons To backup whole server you can select the connection and choose Backup Server xxx To backup your connection settings see Migrate Navicat to new computer Report can be printed to physical printer or in various formats e g Excel HTML PDF and more Select the report to the Selected Jobs list will allow you to set Report Type To edit this setting later right click the report and select Adjust Parameter from the pop up menu Exported file or printed report can be added to the batch job as mail attachment Select the job in the Selected Jobs list and click 1 Add Attachment or 1 Remove Attachment to add or remove the mail attachment To find Data Transfer or Data Synchronization profile choose Z Navicat at the top on the left panel Advanced Settings for Batch Job Schedule Send Email Navicat allows you to generate and send personalized e mails with results returned from a schedule The resultset s can be emailed to multiple recipients Check this option and enter required information From Specify e mail address of sender For example someone navicat com To CC Specify e mail addresses of each recipient separating them with a comma or a semicolon Subjec
195. ength Decimals Character set and or Enum Hint Once uncheck the Show wizard next time you can go to Options to enable it Definition 44 Definition consists of a valid SQL procedure statement This can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT or it can be a compound statement written using BEGIN and END Compound statements can contain declarations loops and other control structure statements Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Parameter Define function procedure parameter Return Type This text box will be enabled only for creating a function It indicates the return type of the function Type Select the stored routines you wish to create from the drop down list i e PROCEDURE and FUNCTION Advanced Properties Security Specify whether the routine should be executed using the permissions of the user who creates the routine or the user who invokes it Definer The default Definer value is the user who executes the CREATE PROCEDURE or CREATE FUNCTION statement This is the same as DEFINER CURRENT USER If a user value is given it should be a MySQL account in user_name host_name format the same format used in the GRANT statement The user_name and host_name values both are required Data Access several characteristics provide information about the nature of data use by the routine Contains SQL Indicate that the
196. esolve in the schema where the class resides Resolver Specify a mapping of the fully qualified Java name to a Java schema object Compile or Resolve Check this to specify that Oracle Database should attempt to resolve the Java schema object that is created if this statement succeeds No Force Check this to roll back the results of the CREATE command of Java if you have enabled Compile or Resolve and the resolution or compilation fails If you do not specify this option then Oracle Database takes no action if the resolution or compilation fails and the created schema object remains Oracle Materialized Views Materialized view is a schema object that can be used to summarize compute replicate and distribute data Click wi gt Materialized View to open an object list for Materialized View You can create a view shortcut by right click a materialized view in the Object List pane and select Create Open Materialized View Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your materialized view directly without activating the main Navicat Button Description 0 Preview the result of the materialized view G Explain Show the Query Plan of the materialized view my Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor 75 Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or
197. ess Use transaction Check this option if you use transaction during the data transfer process Use complete insert statements Insert records using complete insert syntax Example INSERT INTO users ID Number User Name User Age VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 INSERT INTO users ID Number User Name User Age VALUES 2 Johnson Ryne 56 INSERT INTO users ID Number User Name User Age VALUES 0 katherine 23 Use extended insert statements Insert records using extended insert syntax Example INSERT INTO users VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 2 Johnson Ryne 56 0 Katherine 23 Use delayed insert statements Insert records using DELAYED insert SQL statements 238 Example INSERT DELAYED INTO users VALUES 1 Peter McKindsy 23 INSERT DELAYED INTO users VALUES 2 Johnson Ryne 56 INSERT DELAYED INTO users VALUES 0 katherine 23 Run multiple insert statements Check this option if you want to run multiple insert statements in each execution which will make the data transfer process faster Use hexadecimal format for BLOB Insert BLOB data as hexadecimal format Continue on error Ignore errors that are encountered during the transfer process Lock source tables Lock the tables in the source database and or schema so that any update on the table is
198. et of the UPDATE command When Clause Specify a Boolean WHEN condition which will be tested to see whether the trigger should be fired Trigger Function Schema and Trigger Function A user supplied function that is declared as taking no arguments and returning type trigger which is executed when the trigger fires Arguments An optional comma separated list of arguments to be provided to the function when the trigger is executed The arguments are literal string constants Simple names and numeric constants may be written here too but they will all be converted to strings Please check the description of the implementation language of the trigger function about how the trigger arguments are accessible within the function it may be different from normal function arguments Comment Define the comment for the trigger 107 Table Options for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables Foreign Server The name of an existing server for the foreign table Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Options Options to be associated with the foreign table The allowed option Name and Value are specific to each foreign data wrapper and are validated using the foreign data wrapper s validator function Owner Define the user to own this table Inherits from This option specifies a list of tables from which the new table automatically inherits all columns To set the new table to be inherited from one or several existing tables just simply c
199. etion can be also applied on View Functions Procedures etc Related topic Code Insight Options Code Folding Code folding feature enables you to collapse blocks of code such that only the first line of the block appears in Editor A block of code that can be folded is indicated by an icon E to the left of the first line of the block A vertical line extends from the icon to the bottom of the foldable code In contrast a folded block of code is indicated by an icon to left of the code block You can fold the block by clicking or expand it by clicking in Editor CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION get max checkpoint sessionnum IN NUMBER RETURN number IS ckpt number E BEGIN select ckpt sen into ckpt T from m7 Fn A ta Ro f where rownum 1 return ckpt END get_max checkpoint Ro He Lal Brace Highlight Navicat supports to highlight the matching brace in the editor i e Note The cursor must be on a brace to show the highlight CREATE OR REPLACE D Rr Subptxt name varchar subname varchar usr varchar TEHt in out varchar2 is in oom Go Ra begin subptxt2 name subname usr null null txt end Ca Find and Replace Find The Find Dialog is provided for quick searching for the text in the editor window Just simply click Edit gt Find from the menu or press CTRL F and enter a search string 204 moo om tf b fo Ao je Highlight All _ Replace The search starts at the cursor
200. eys within 24 hours it is probably that the e mail we sent was blocked by your email spam filter To resend your download information and keys please submit your registered email address to our Customer Center If you get no reply from the resend form please contact our Navicat Sales Department Besides if you feel uncomfortable with providing your personal information over the Internet we accept Purchase Order and Bank Wire Transfer Please visit our Offline Order Installation We strongly suggest that you shut down any opened applications This will help ensure a smooth installation Note Installing Navicat does not include the server installation You should download and install the server manually For user who has been trying our unregistered version just simply key in the Registration Key 16 digit on the pop up Registration screen Installation for Download Version 1 Open or Save the exe file 2 Click Next at the Welcome Screen 3 Read the License Agreement Accept it and click Next 4 Accept the location of the program icons by clicking Next If you wish to change the destination of the folder for Navicat program click Browse 5 Follow the remaining steps After installed key in the Registration Key 16 digit on the pop up Registration screen and click Activate to online activate the key Installation for CD Version 1 Load the Navicat CD Installation disk into the CD ROM drive 2 Open the exe file
201. field automatically is initialized and updated to the current timestamp Values Use this edit box to define the members of SET ENUM Virtual Type Choose the virtual column s type VIRTUAL means that the column is calculated on the fly when a command names it PERSISTENT means that the value is physically stored in the table Note Support from MariaDB 5 2 or later Expression Specify an expression or function to evaluate at insertion time Note Support from MariaDB 5 2 or later MySQL MariaDB Table Indexes Indexes are organized versions of specific columns in your tables MySQL uses indexes to facilitate quick retrieval of records With indexes MySQL can jump directly to the records you want Without any indexes MySQL has to read the entire data file to find the correct record s In the Indexes tab just simply click an index field for editing By using the index toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected index field Button Description ks Add Index Add an index to the table Fia Delete Index Delete the selected index Use the Name edit box to set the index name To include field s in the index just simply double click the Fields field or click to open the editor for editing Select the field s from the list To remove the fields from the index uncheck them in the same way You can also use the arrow buttons to change the index field s order The Sub Part edit box s is used to set index KEY
202. file Or choose No Logging for no log Visibility Specify the index is Visible or Invisible to the optimizer Online To indicate that DML operations on the table will be allowed during creation of the index No Sort To indicate to the database that the rows are already stored in the database in ascending order so that Oracle Database does not have to sort the rows when creating the index Physical Attributes Set the physical attributes of an index Oracle Java Java is an object oriented programming language efficient for application level programs You can write and load applications within the database Click aS gt Java to open an object list for Java You can choose the Type Java Source Java Class or Java Resource General Properties for Java Source BFile Select the Directory and type the Server Filename Load from file Browse the File Path of Java source file 74 Plain source Type the source code in the Source box General Properties for Java Class and Java Resource BFile Select the Directory and type the Server Filename Load from file Browse the File Path of Java class or Java resource file Advanced Properties Invoker Rights Select CURRENT_USER to indicate that the methods of the class execute with the privileges of CURRENT USER or DEFINER to indicate that the methods of the class execute with the privileges of the owner of the schema in which the class resides and that external names r
203. for MyISAM table Check this option if you want to delay key updates for the table until the table is closed Data Directory To specify where the MyISAM storage engine should put a table s data file Index Directory To specify where the MyISAM storage engine should put a table s index file Union only for MRG_MYISAM table UNION is used when you want to access a collection of identical My SAM tables as one This works only with MERGE tables You must have SELECT UPDATE and DELETE privileges for the tables you map to a MERGE table Insert Method only for MRG_MYISAM table If you want to insert data into a MERGE table you must specify with INSERT METHOD the table into which the row should be inserted INSERT METHOD is an option useful for MERGE tables only Use a value of FIRST or LAST to have inserts go to the first or last table or a value of NO to prevent inserts Connection only for FEDERATED table To create the local table that will be federated to the remote table You can create the local table and specify the connection string containing the server name login password to be used to connect to the remote table using the Connection edit box The CONNECTION string contains the information required to connect to the remote server containing the table that will be used to physically store the data The connection string specifies the server name login credentials port number and database table information The forma
204. for editing A right click displays the pop up menu or using the field toolbar you can create new and drop the selected field To search a field name choose Edit gt Find or press CTRL F Button Description oO w Add Field Add a field to the table Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field Note Only available when creating a new table s Delete Field Delete the selected field P Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key and set the Primary Key free mene rime Move Up Move Move the selected field up down Use the Name edit box to set the field name Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names in the table The Type drop down list defines the type of the field data See PostgreSQL Data Types for details Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Decimals edit box to define the number of digits after the decimal point the scale for Floating Point data type Note Be careful when shortening the field length as losing data might be caused Not null Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field P Primary Key A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record None of the fields that are part of the primary key can contain a null value Field s Pop up Options Duplicate Field Add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields Primary Key Name Properties The primary key constrain
205. forces the user or the DBA to change the password before the user can log in to the database External An external user must be authenticated by an external service such as an operating system or a third party service Global A global user must be authorized by the enterprise directory service Oracle Internet Directory X 500 Name Enter the X 509 name at the enterprise directory service that identifies this user Default Table Space Choose the default tablespace for objects that the user creates Temporary Table Space Choose the tablespace or tablespace group for the user s temporary segments Profile Choose the profile that assign to the user Lock Account Lock the user s account and disable access Member of In the grid check Granted Admin Option or As Default option against the role listed in Role Name to assign this user to be a member of selected role Multiple roles can be granted Quotas In the grid specify the maximum amount of space the user can allocate in the tablespaces Enter the Quota and choose the Unit of the Tablespace Unlimited lets the user allocate space in the tablespace without bound Multiple tablespaces can be set Server Privileges In the grid check Granted or Admin Option option against the server privilege listed in Privilege to assign this user to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted Privileges To edit specific object privileges for user click Add Priv
206. fy Each constraint must be an expression producing a Boolean result It should use the key word VALUE to refer to the value being tested PostgreSQL Indexes Index provides a faster access path to table data It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL statement execution on that table Click aS gt Index to open an object list for Index General Properties 115 Unique Makes index unique causes the system to check for duplicate values in the table when the index is created if data already exist and each time data is added Table name The name possibly schema qualified of the table to be indexed Method Define the type of the index Name Expression The name of a column of the table Or an expression based on one or more columns of the table Collate Choose the collation for the index Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Operator Class Schema and Operator Class The schema and name of an operator class Sort Order only for B Tree index Specify the sort order ASC or DESC Nulls Order only for B Tree index Specify that nulls sort before NULLS FIRST after NULLS LAST non nulls Advanced Properties Clustered CLUSTER instructs PostgreSQL to cluster the table specified by tablename based on the index specified by indexname The index must already have been defined on tablename When a table is clustered PostgreSQL remembers on which index it was clustered The form CL
207. fy the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes Block Size The block size for the tablespace Default Storage Options Set the default storage characteristics for objects created in the tablespace Table Compression Use the drop down list to select the type of compressing data segments to reduce disk use Manual Segment Management To manage the free space of segments in the tablespace using free lists Extent Management DICTIONARY Extent management by the data dictionary LOCAL Extent management by the bitmaps Local Extent AUTOALLOCATE The tablespace is system managed UNIFORM The tablespace is managed with uniform extents of size 89 Uniform Size The size of uniform extent The default size is 1 megabyte Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes Advanced Properties Logging LOGGING Log all objects within the tablspace in the redo log file NOLOGGING No operations are logged Force Logging Oracle Database will log all changes to all objects in the tablespace except changes to temporary segments overriding any NOLOGGING setting for individual objects Offline The tablespace is unavailable immediately offline after creation Retention Guarantee Oracle Database should preserve unexpired undo data in all undo segments of tablespace even if doing so forces the
208. g inthe grey area beside each statement To add a variable to the watch list right click the highlighted code and choose Add to watch list To show the debug tips mouse over the code The Breakpoints pane displays all the breakpoints which allowing you to delete enable or disable breakpoints To enable disable a breakpoint check uncheck the check box Also you can delete a breakpoint or all breakpoints right click a breakpoint and choose Remove Breakpoint or Remove All Breakpoints To jump to the line of a breakpoint right click it and choose Goto Function 56 The Call Stack pane displays the procedure or function calls of the current line To jump to a procedure or function right click it and choose Goto Function The DBMS Output pane displays the results after the function or procedure has completed the execution The Log pane shows the message log when debugging the code The Smart Data pane displays information about the variables associated with breakpoints To add a variable to the watch list right click a variable and choose Add to watch list You can adjust the value of a watch variable by right click the variable and choose Adjust Value The Watch List pane displays information about the variables being watched allowing you to add delete or edit watch variables To add a watch variable right click anywhere of Watch List view and choose Add Variable Then enter the Variable Name Also you can right click the highligh
209. g all the field names in the table The Type drop down list defines the type of the field data See SQL Server Data Type and SQL Azure Support Data Type for details 152 Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Scale edit box to define the number of digits after the decimal point the scale for Floating Point data type Note Be careful when shortening the field length as losing data might be caused Not null Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field P Primary Key A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record None of the fields that are part of the primary key can contain a null value Field s Pop up Options Duplicate Field Add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields Primary Key Name Enter the primary key constraint name Design Primary Key Index Design the primary key index Field s Properties Note The following options depend on the field type you are chosen Identity Indicate that the new column is an identity column Row GUID Indicate that the new column is a row GUID column Only one uniqueidentifier column per table can be designated as the ROWGUIDCOL column Note SQL Azure does not support Collation Specify the collation for the column Column Set For All Sparse Columns Combine all of the sparse columns of a table into a structured output Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or late
210. ger to the table fe Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name Use the Fires drop down list to define the trigger action time It can be Before or After to indicate that the trigger activates before or after the statement that activated it Insert The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table For example INSERT LOAD DATA and REPLACE statements Update The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified For example UPDATE statement Delete The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table For example DELETE and REPLACE statement However DROP TABLE and TRUNCATE statements on the table do not activate the trigger The Definition tab defines the statement to execute when the trigger activates To include your statement just simply click to write If you want to execute multiple statements use the BEGIN END compound statement construct Example 39 BEGIN set new capacity new capacity 100 set new amount new amount 100 END MySQL MariaDB Table Options Engine Define the engine of the table Character set Define the type of the character set for table Collation Choose the collation for the table Auto Increment Set Reset the Auto Increment value in the edit field The auto increment value indicates the value for next record Checksum Table Checksum only for MyISAM and Aria tables Check this o
211. grades and receiving bug fix releases at no additional cost during the protected period Subscription to the Maintenance Plan is done at the time of your software license purchase or within 90 days as of your purchase date it cannot be added to a previously purchased product at a later date For details please click here How to upgrade your Navicat If you want to upgrade installed copy of Navicat to the latest release please choose Help gt Check For Updates to start the Updater It will automatically check your installed version If there is a new version simply follow the steps in the Updater to upgrade your Navicat It will replace your previous Navicat and your current settings will remain unchanged Or you can submit your registered email address on the Customer Center to download the latest version installer End User License Agreement Note For the License Agreement of Navicat Cloud service please click here IMPORTANT THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR IF PURCHASED OR OTHERWISE ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY AN ENTITY AND PREMIUMSOFT CYBERTECH LTD READ IT CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AND USING THE SOFTWARE IT PROVIDES A LICENSE TO USE THE SOFTWARE AND CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMATION AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMERS BY INSTALLING AND USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE CONFIRMING YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND AGREEING TO BECOME BOUND
212. he directory in which databases being stored By default all databases store within a directory called data under MySQL Installation folder For example C mysal5 data Note You must stop MySQL before you can rename the database Database Name Set the name for a new database Character set Specify the default database character set Collation Specify the default database collation MySQL MariaDB Tables Relational databases use tables to store data All operations on data are done on the tables themselves or produce another table as the result A table is a set of rows and columns and their intersections are fields From a general perspective columns within a table describe the name and type of data that will be found by row for that column s fields Rows within a table represent records composed of fields that are described from left to right by their corresponding column s name and type Each field in a row is implicitly correlated with each other field in that row Click E to open an object list for Table When open a table with graphical fields right click a table and select Open Table Quick from the pop up menu Faster performance for opening the graphical table as BLOB fields images will not be loaded until you click on the cell If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table use Open Table You can create a table shortcut by right click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Ope
213. he bounding box Max Coordinates Specify the x coordinate X and y coordinate Y of the upper right corner of the bounding box Level 1 Specify the first top level grid Level 2 Specify the second level grid Level 3 Specify the third level grid Level 4 Specify the fourth level grid Cells Per Object Specify the number of tessellation cells per object that can be used for a single spatial object in the index by the tessellation process Advanced Properties for Spatial Index Recompute statistics Enable automatic statistics updating Allow row locks Row locks are allowed when accessing the index The Database Engine determines when row locks are used Note SQL Azure does not support Allow page locks Page locks are allowed when accessing the index The Database Engine determines when page locks are used 167 Note SQL Azure does not support Fill Factor Specify a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of each index page during index creation or rebuild Note SQL Azure does not support Pad Index The percentage of free space that is specified by fillfactor is applied to the intermediate level pages of the index Note SQL Azure does not support Sort in tempdb Specify to store temporary sort results in tempdb Note SQL Azure does not support Max degree of parallelism Override the max degree of parallelism configuration option fo
214. he editor for editing Note Some of data types do not allow indexing For example text The Index Type drop down list defines the type of the table index 154 Clustered Create an index in which the logical order of the key values determines the physical order of the corresponding rows in a table N on Clustered Create an index that specifies the logical ordering of a table With a nonclustered index the physical order of the data rows is independent of their indexed order Spatial Create a spatial index on a specified table and column An index can be created before there is data in the table Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure XML Create an XML index on a specified table An index can be created before there is data in the table Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Unique Create a unique index on a table Comment Specify the comment of the index Note SQL Azure does not support SQL Server Table Foreign Keys A foreign key is a field in a relational table that matches the primary key column of another table The foreign key can be used to cross reference tables In the Foreign Keys tab just simply click a foreign key field for editing By using the foreign key toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected foreign key field Button Description amp Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table amp Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key
215. he event executes one time only at the date and time given as the timestamp which must include both the date and time or must be an expression that resolves to a datetime value Use INTERVAL to create an event which occurs at some point in the future relative to the current date and time 46 EVERY For actions which are to be repeated at a regular interval you can use an EVERY clause which followed by an interval INTERVAL is not used with EVERY STARTS An EVERY clause may also contain an optional STARTS clause STARTS is followed by a timestamp value which indicates when the action should begin repeating and may also use INTERVAL interval in order to specify an amount of time from now For example EVERY 3 MONTH STARTS CURRENT_TIMESTAMP 1 WEEK means every three months beginning one week from now ENDS An EVERY clause may also contain an optional ENDS clause The ENDS keyword is followed by a timestamp value which tells MySQL when the event should stop repeating You may also use INTERVAL interval with ENDS For example EVERY 12 HOUR STARTS CURRENT_TIMESTAMP INTERVAL 30 MINUTE ENDS CURRENT_TIMESTAMP INTERVAL 4 WEEK is equivalent to every twelve hours beginning thirty minutes from now and ending four weeks from now P S The timestamp must be in the future you cannot schedule an event to take place in the past The interval portion consists of two parts a quantity and a unit of time YEAR QUARTER
216. he maximum number of worker processes that can be used for the job Reuse File A preexisting file will be overwritten Enable XMLCLOBS Check this box to enable data options for XMLCLOBS 50 Version The version of database objects to be extracted COMPATIBLE The version of the metadata corresponds to the database compatibility level and the compatibility release level for feature LATEST The version of the metadata corresponds to the database version Compression Type ALL Compress both user data and metadata DATA_ONLY Compress only user data in the dump file set METADATA_ONLY Compress only metadata in the dump file set NONE Store the dump file set in an uncompressed format Transportable Operate on metadata for tables and their dependent objects within a set of selected tablespaces to perform a transportable tablespace export Database Link The name of a database link to the remote database that will be the source of data and metadata for the current job Estimate Specify that the estimate method for the size of the tables should be performed before starting the job Log File Directory Choose the log file directory Log File Name Enter the name of the log file Flashback SCN System change number SCN to serve as transactionally consistent point for reading user data Flashback Time Either the date and time used to determine a consistent point for reading user data or a string of the f
217. he profile and click the Load button or double click it in the Profiles tab General Settings for Data Transfer Source Define connection database and or schema for the source All the database objects are selected in the Database Objects list by default If you do not want some database objects to be transferred uncheck them 236 With this option is on only the checked database objects will be transferred However if you add any new database objects in the source database and or schema after you create your data transfer profile the newly added database objects will not be transferred unless you manually modify the Database Objects list b Choose this option if you wish all the database objects being transferred to the target database schema all newly added database objects will also be transferred without amending the data transfer profile Target Connection Transfer your selected database objects directly to a connection database and or schema File Transfer your selected database objects directly to a text file You can select different SQL Format and Encoding for the file Advanced Settings for Same Server Type Data Transfer In this tab you can choose the advanced settings for transferring between same server type or between MySQL and MariaDB The following options depend on the database type you are chosen MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQLite SQL Server and MariaDB Create tables Create tables in the ta
218. hoose the edition of the database web or business Max Size Choose the maximum size of the database General Properties for SQL Server Database Name Define the name of the database Owner Choose the owner of the database Collation Choose the default collation for the database Collation name can be either a Windows collation name or a SQL 142 collation name If not specified the database is assigned the default collation of the instance of SQL Server A collation name cannot be specified on a database snapshot Recovery Model Control database recovery options and disk I O error checking Provide full recovery after media failure by using transaction log backups If a data file is damaged media recovery can restore all committed transactions BULK_LOGGED Provide recovery after media failure by combining the best performance and least INi P nra a SIMPLE A simple backup strategy that uses minimal log space is provided Log space can be m AAA Compatibility Level Choose the version of SQL Server with which the database is to be made compatible Filegroups Properties for SQL Server Filegroups Add or delete a filegroup PRIMARY filegroup cannot be deleted FILESTREAM Filegroups Add or delete a FILESTREAM filegroup Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Files Properties for SQL Server Name Specify the logical name for the file Type Choose the file type Filegroup Choose the f
219. hy will be called for all tables created during schema registration with hierarchy_type as DBMS_XDBZ ENABLE_ CONTENTS ENABLE_HIERARCHY_RESMETADATA Enable hierarchy will be called on all tables created during schema registration with hierarchy_type as DBMS_XDBZ ENABLE_RESMETADATA Oracle Recycle Bin Recycle bin is actually a data dictionary table containing information about dropped objects Dropped tables and any associated objects such as indexes constraints nested tables and the likes are not removed and still occupy space They continue to count against user space quotas until specifically purged from the recycle bin or the unlikely situation where they must be purged by the database because of tablespace space constraints Click di gt Recycle Bin to open an object list for Recycle Bin To restore a table 1 Choose a table in recycle bin 2 Click Flashback Table from the object list toolbar To remove an object 1 Select an object for purging in the Object List pane 2 Click i Purge Object from the object list toolbar 3 Confirm deleting in the dialog window To remove all objects 1 Right click and select the Purge Recycle Bin from the pop up menu 2 Confirm deleting in the dialog window To remove all objects of any users 1 Log in a user has the SYSDBA privilege 2 Right click and select Purge DBA Recycle Bin from the pop up menu 3 Confirm deleting in the dialog window Oracle Directories
220. iew of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features 69 Advanced Properties Restrict Query Specify the name If you omit this identifier then Oracle automatically assigns a name of the form SYS_Cn where n is an integer that makes the constraint name unique within the database Read Only Indicate that the table or view cannot be updated Check option Indicate that Oracle Database prohibits any changes to the table or view that would produce rows that are not included in the subquery Force On Create Check this option if you want to create the view regardless of whether the base tables of the view or the referenced object types exist or the owner of the schema containing the view has privileges on them View Viewer View Viewer displays the view data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View See Table Viewer for details Oracle Functions Procedures A procedure or function is a schema object that consists of a set of SQL statements and other PL SQL constructs grouped together stored in the database and run as a unit to solve a specific problem or perform a set of related tasks Procedures and functions are identical except that functions always return a single value to the caller while procedures do not Click E to open an object list for Function Function Wizard f m m Click the New Function from the object list toolbar The Function Wi
221. ilege to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object 2 Check the object to show the grid on the right panel 2 3 3 Inthe grid check Granted or Grant Option option against the privilege listed in Privilege to assign this user to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted Oracle Role Designer General Properties Role name Set name for role Authentication Select the authentication method Password Password Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box External An external user must be authenticated by an external service such as an operating system pol a Global A global user must be authorized to use the role by the enterprise directory service before the role is enabled at login Not Identified The role is authorized by the database and that no password is required to enable the role Member of In the grid check Granted or Admin Option option against the role listed in Role Name to assign this role to be a member of selected role Multiple roles can be granted Members In the grid check Granted or Admin Option option against user listed in Member to assign the selected user to be a member of this role Multiple users can be granted Server Privileges In the grid check Granted or Admin Option option against the server privilege listed in Privilege to assign this role to have that privilege Multiple p
222. ilegroup File Directory The path used by the operating system when you create the file File Name The file name used by the operating system when you create the file Size Specify the size of the file 143 Allow Auto Growth Check this option if you want to allow automatic growth Growth Specify the automatic growth increment of the file Max Size Specify the maximum size to which the file can grow Unlimited Specify that the file grows until the disk is full In SQL Server a log file specified with unlimited growth has a maximum size of 2 TB and a data file has a maximum size of 16 TB Advanced Properties State for SQL Server Database Read Only If this option is on users can read data from the database but not modify it Database State Choose the state of the database OFFLINE The database is closed shut down cleanly and marked offline The database cannot be modified while it is offline ONLINE The database is open and available for use EMERGENCY The database is marked READ_ONLY logging is disabled and access is limited to members of the sysadmin fixed server role EMERGENCY is primarily used for troubleshooting purposes Restrict Access Control user access to the database SINGLE_USER Specifies that only one user at a time can access the database RESTRICTED USER RESTRICTED USER allows for only members of the db_ owner fixed database role and dbcreator and sysadmin fix
223. imply right click anywhere on the table grid and select Display gt Show Hide Columns or select View gt Show Hide Columns from the menu Select the columns that you would like to hide The hidden column s will disappear from the table grid To unhide the columns just simply right click anywhere on the table grid and select Display gt Show Hide Columns or select View gt Show Hide Columns from the menu Select the columns that you would like to redisplay w customer_id customerid store_id last_name address_id if store_id 1 SMITH 1 JOHNSON U first_name W last_name 1 WILLIAMS 2 JONES email 1 BROWN W address_id il active W create_date Lf Ww MM D co om n Show Hide ROWID If you want to display or hide the rowid address of every row right click anywhere on the table grid and select Display gt Show Hide ROWID or select View gt Show Hide ROWID from the menu The column ROWID will be showed in the last column Note Available only for Oracle and SQLite Form View Available only in Full Version Form View allows you to view update insert or delete data as a form which the current record is displayed field name and its value The pop up menu of the form provides the following additional functions set the field value as Null Empty String use current field value as a filter format form view and more The navigation bar allows you to switch the records quickly insert update o
224. in internal tables of the database where the query optimizer can access the information and use it to help make better query planning choices Vacuum Database Rebuild the entire database VACUUM only works on the main database It is not possible to VACUUM an attached database file Reindex Database and Reindex Tables Delete and recreate all indexes in database or attached to the tables from scratch This is useful when the definition of a collation sequence has changed Maintain Index Reindex Delete and recreate the index from scratch This is useful when the definition of a collation sequence has changed Maintain SQL Server Maintain Assembly Set Visible To show the assembly Set Invisible To hide the assembly Maintain Index Rebuild To rebuild and enable the index Reorganize To reorganize the enabled index 184 Disable To disable the index Maintain Trigger Enable To enable the server trigger database trigger or trigger Disable To disable the server trigger database trigger or trigger Maintain Login Enable To enable the login Disable To disable the login 185 Table Viewer Table Viewer displays the table data as a grid Data can be displayed in two modes Grid View and Form View The toolbars of Table Viewer provides the following functions for managing data e Begin Transaction Commit Rollback Click Te Begin Transaction to start a transaction To make permanent
225. in the Confirm Password text box Owned Schemas You can check the schema listed in Owned Schemas tab to change schema ownership to this application role Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Object Permissions To edit specific object permission for application role click gt Add Permission to open the window and follow the steps below 285 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object 2 Check the object to show the grid on the right panel In the grid check Grant With Grant Option or Deny against the permission listed in Privilege to assign this application role to have that permission Multiple permissions can be granted Note SQL Azure does not support application role SQLite Security By default a SQLite database does not require user authentication no authentication required database After you created a user the database will be marked as requiring authentication authentication required database Then user need to provide username and password when connecting to the database file SQLite User Designer User name Set name for user Password Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Administrator Check this option to give the admin privilege to the user Privilege Manager Besides setting privileges in each user the Privilege Manager provides another view on privileges in connection and its database objects Note Available only for MySQL
226. including negligence product liability or otherwise even if PremiumSoft or its representatives have been advised of the possibility of such damages 8 Third Party Software The Software may contain third party software which requires notices and or additional terms and conditions By accepting this EULA you are also accepting the additional terms and conditions of the third party software 9 General No PremiumSoft dealer agent or employee is authorized to make any amendment to this EULA This EULA contains the complete agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and Supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings whether oral or written You agree that any varying or additional terms contained in any purchase order or other written notification or document issued by you in relation to the Software licensed hereunder shall be of no effect The failure or delay of PremiumSoft to exercise any of its rights under this EULA or upon any breach of this EULA shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or of the breach If any provision of this EULA shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible and the remaining provisions of this EULA will remain in full force and effect 10 Basis of Bargain The Limited Warranty and Disclaimer and Limited Liability set forth above are fundamental elements of
227. ing disabled Navicat cannot connect via SSH Port 22 Host Name IP Address A host where SSH server is activated Port A port where SSH server is activated by default it is 22 User Name A user on SSH server machine It is not a user of database server Authentication Method Provide the SSH server user Password Public Key Private Key It is used together with your public key The private key should be readable only by you Passphrase A passphrase is exactly like a password except that it applies to the keys you are generating and not an account Note Navicat host name at the General tab should be set relatively to the SSH server which provided by your database hosting company HTTP Settings HTTP Tunneling is a method for connecting to a server that uses the same protocol http and the same port port 80 as a web server does It is used while your ISPs do not allow direct connections but allows establishing HTTP connections Note Available only for MySQL PostgreSQL SQLite and MariaDB Uploading the Tunneling Script To use this connection method first thing you need to do is to upload the tunneling script to the web server where your server is located Note ntunnel_mysqlI php for both MySQL and MariaDB ntunnel_pgsql php or ntunnel_sqlite php is available in the Navicat installation folder 32 Setting up HTTP Tunnel The following instruction guides you through the process of configu
228. inging it You can set the period between pings in the edit field Use Compression This option allows you to use compression protocol It is used if both client and server support zlib compression and the client requests compression Use Named Pipe Socket With this option on Navicat uses socket file for localhost connection 28 Oracle Connection Role Indicate that the database user is connecting with either the Default SYSOPER or SYSDBA system privilege Keepalive Interval sec This option allows you to keep the connection with the server alive by pinging it You can set the period between pings in the edit field OS Authentication With this option on Oracle Database uses Windows user login credentials to authenticate database users PostgreSQL Connection Keepalive Interval sec This option allows you to keep the connection with the server alive by pinging it You can set the period between pings in the edit field SQLite Connection Encrypted Enable this option and provide Password when connecting to an encrypted SQLite database Attached Database To attach or detach databases in the connection SQL Server Connection Initial Database The initial database to which user connects when making connection Keepalive Interval sec This option allows you to keep the connection with the server alive by pinging it You can set the period between pings in the edit field Use Encryption This option allows
229. ints To jump to the line of a breakpoint right click it and choose Goto Function The Call Stack tab displays the function calls of the current line The Results tab displays the results after the function has completed the execution 92 The Log tab shows the message log when debugging the code The Local Variables tab displays the varaibles in function The Parameters tab displays the inputted parameters PostgreSQL Schemas A schema Is essentially a namespace it contains named objects tables data types functions and operators whose names may duplicate those of other objects existing in other schemas The schema name must be distinct from any existing schema name in the current database General Properties Schema Name The name of a schema to be created The name cannot begin with pg_ as such names are reserved for system schemas Owner The name of the user who will own the schema If omitted defaults to the user executing the command PostgreSQL Tables Relational databases use tables to store data All operations on data are done on the tables themselves or produce another table as the result A table is a set of rows and columns and their intersections are fields From a general perspective columns within a table describe the name and type of data that will be found by row for that column s fields Rows within a table represent records composed of fields that are described from left to right by their correspondi
230. ion Control whether a backup operation checks the expiration date and time of the backup sets on the media before overwriting them Media Set Name Specify the media name for the entire backup media set Password Set the password for the media set Truncate the transaction log Choose this option to truncate the transaction log Backup the tail log and set database to recovery state Choose this option to back up the tail of the log and leaves the database in the RESTORING state Verify backup Check this options to verify the backup Perform checksum Enable the backup checksums 149 Continue on error Instruct backup to continue despite encountering errors such as invalid checksums or torn pages Compression Specify whether backup compression is performed on this backup Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure SQL Server Restore Before starting the restore process click Generate SQL button to review the SQL Then you can click the Restore button to run it If you want to restore from a file that is not listed in the Object List pane you can right click anywhere in the Object List pane and choose Restore From File General Properties for Restore Backup Restore to database Select the database to restore Latest possible only for Transaction Log backup Choose this option if do not have the restore point Specific time only for Transaction Log backup Specify that the databas
231. ir specific needs yet easy to learn for users who are new to database server With its well designed Graphical User Interface GUI Navicat lets you quickly and easily create organize access and share information in a secure and easy way Navicat is available on three platforms Microsoft Windows Mac OS X and Linux It can connect users to local remote server providing several utility tools such as Data Modeling Data Transfer Data Structure Synchronization Import Export Backup Restore Report Builder and Schedule to facilitate the process for data maintenance For details visit our web site http www navicat com File View Favorites Tools Window Help Connection User 4 Navicat Cloud 4 Office Main Office UK Office 4 Project MH 0015 4 Development Servers Development 03 Bj Development 01 4 Production Servers r Oo Project DT 0052 adamsmith 1 8 Team A s TeamB a EJ Testing Server 02 hr 4 amp sakila gt EQ Tables b co Views gt fi Functions gt FD Events gt OFS Queries gt E Reports b 29 Backups 4 Production Server amp HR M Schemas 4 B My Connections 0 MariaDB E MySQL D Oracle a M PostgreSQL gt ce he View Function Event Query Open Table Name actor address category city country customer film film_actor film_category film_text inventory language payment rental lt General DDL Name Name Database Group Name Rows Table Typ
232. it and can invoke procedures Click as gt Trigger to open an object list for Trigger See Triggers for details You can choose the Trigger Type TABLE VIEW SCHEMA or DATABASE General Properties for Table Trigger Enable An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction if any evaluates to true Table schema The table schema of the trigger Table name The table you wish to create the trigger Compound A compound trigger is a single trigger on a table that allows you to specify actions for each of four timing points Before the triggering statement executes BEFORE STATEMENT Before each row that the triggering statement affects BEFORE EACH ROW After each row that the triggering statement affects AFTER EACH ROW After the triggering statement executes AFTER STATEMENT Note Support from Oracle 11g or later and you can edit the SQL in Trigger Definition Fire When defining a trigger you can specify the trigger timing whether the trigger action is to be run BEFORE or AFTER the triggering statement For Each Oracle Database fires a ROW trigger once for each row that is affected by the triggering statement and fires a STATEMENT trigger only once when the triggering statement is issued if the optional trigger constraint is met When To specify the trigger condition which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger
233. itmap GIF Icon JPEG and Metafile Keep Together Control the pagination of the component when the contents cannot fit on the current page LookAhead Display summary calculations in the title band page footer calculations in the page header band group footer calculations in the group header band and column footer calculations in the column header ParentHeight Force the height of the component to match height of the parent component The parent may be either a band ora region 267 ParentWidth Force the width of the component to match width of the parent component ParentPrinterSetup Determines whether the values for the PrinterSetup property should be copied from the parent report PrintHumanReadable Output the human readable version of the bar code i e the actual letters or numbers ReprintOnOverFlow Use to print non stretching components when stretching components are printing on additional pages ReprintOnSubsequent Use in conjunction with the SuppressRepeatedValues property When SuppressRepeatedValues is set to True and detail lines have overflowed onto a new page you can force the value to reprint on the first detail line of the new page by setting ReprintOnSubsequent to True ResetPageNo Enable subset page numbering In subset page numbers the page numbers and page count of the subreport are displayed instead of the master report page numbers Section The report prints as a separate section sta
234. ize to Fit Resize the table automatically to fit its contents Bring to Front Bring the table to the foreground Send to Back Move the table to the background Create Views To create a new view click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas To add an existing view from the Explorer s Model tab simply drag and drop the selected view from the Model tab to the canvas Note If you right click the view connector you can choose to add or delete vertices and change its color or go to the source view and the target table The pop up menu options of the view object in canvas include Design View Edit the view structure in a designer The tabs and options in the designer depend on the diagram database type you are chosen For the settings of different tabs see Server Objects Add Related Objects Add all related tables views to the selected view Cut Remove the view from the diagram and put it on the clipboard 213 Copy Copy the view from the diagram to the clipboard Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram Select All Views Select all the views in the diagram Delete Delete a view from the diagram or from both diagram and model Rename Change the name of the view Color Change the color of the view Size to Fit Resize the view automatically to fit its contents Bring to Front Bring the view to the foreground Send to Back
235. l be created on the referencing table automatically if it does not exist amp Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key Note Support from MySQL 4 0 13 or later Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key Use the Referenced Database and Referenced Table drop down lists to select a foreign database and table respectively To include field s referenced field s to the key just simply double click the Fields Referenced Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing 38 The On Delete and On Update drop down list define the type of the actions to be taken CASCADE Delete the corresponding foreign key or update the corresponding foreign key to the new value of the primary key SET NULL Set all the columns of the corresponding foreign key to NULL No ACTION Does not change the foreign key RESTRICT Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update would create a foreign key constraint violation Related topic Foreign Keys Data Selection MySQL MariaDB Table Triggers A trigger is a named database object that is associated with a table and that is activated when a particular event occurs for the table In the Triggers tab just simply click a trigger field for editing By using the trigger toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected trigger field Note Trigger is supported from MySQL 5 0 2 or later Button Description Add Trigger Add a trig
236. l have thousand separators inserted between each group of three digits to the left of the decimal point The placement and number of characters in the format string does not affect the output except to indicate that thousand separators are wanted The actual character used as a the thousand separator in the output is determined by the ThousandSeparator global variable The default value of ThousandSeparator is specified in the Number Format of the Region and Language Options section in the Windows Control Panel Scientific notation If any of the strings E E e or e are contained in the format string the 298 output for negative exponents The E and e formats output a sign character only for negative exponents Characters enclosed in single or double quotes are output as is and do not affect formatting a Separates sections for positive negative and zero numbers in the format string The locations of the leftmost 0 before the decimal point in the format string and the rightmost 0 after the decimal number is formatted using scientific notation A group of up to four 0 characters can immediately follow the E E e or e to determine the minimum number of digits in the exponent The E and e formats cause a plus sign to be output for positive exponents and a minus sign to be point in the format string determine the range of digits that are always present in the output string The number
237. l_code varc b MariaDB 5 more columns 2 more columns gt E MySQL gt D Oracle a C PostgreSQL 4 C PostgreSQL 9 1 HR lt C Refresh os F Project DT 0052 EN Testing Server 02 User root Database sakila o Object List Display table fields and relationships between tables in a database schema Note Double click a table in ER Diagram view will open the Table Designer while double click a table in List view and Detail view will open the Table Viewer The tabs and options in the designer depend on the diagram database type you have chosen For the settings of different tabs see Server Objects To add a relation click from the bottom toolbar Drag the source table field and drop to the target table field To edit a relation right click a relation and select Design Foreign Key from the pop up menu To delete a relation right click a relation and select Delete Foreign Key from the pop up menu To add a vertex on a relation right click a relation and select Add Vertex from the pop up menu To delete a vertex or all vertices on a relation right click a relation and select Delete Vertex or Delete All Vertices from the pop up menu 2 Overview To zoom in or zoom out the selected area of the diagram adjust the slider of the Overview pane Same effect can be achieved with keyboard shortcuts Zoom In CTRL or CT RL Mousewheel up Zoom Out CTRL or CTRL Mousewheel down 288 3 Toolbar
238. latable data type If not specified the column data type s default collation is used Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Dimensions Set the dimensions of array specifiers Object Schema Set the object schema for the field Object Type Set the object type for the field 105 Checks for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables A check constraint is the most generic constraint type It allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must satisfy a Boolean truth value expression In the Checks tab just simply click a check field for editing By using the check toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected check field Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 5 or later Add Check Add a check to the table Delete Check Delete the selected check Use the Name edit box to set the check name Check Set the condition for checking e g field _name1 gt 0 AND field_name2 gt field_namei in the Check edit box A check constraint specified as a column constraint should reference that column s value only while an expression appearing in a table constraint may reference multiple columns Definition Enter the definition for the check No Inherit The check constraint will not propagate to child tables Comment Enter the comment for the check Triggers for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables A trigger is a specification that the database should automatically execute a particular function whenever a
239. ld have OIDs object identifiers assigned to them Fill Factor The fillfactor for a table is a percentage between 10 and 100 100 complete packing is the default When a smaller fillfactor is specified INSERT operations pack table pages only to the indicated percentage the remaining space on each page is reserved for updating rows on that page This gives UPDATE a chance to place the updated copy of a row on the same page as the original which is more efficient than placing it on a different page For a table whose entries are never updated complete packing is the best choice but in heavily updated tables smaller fillfactors are appropriate Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later PostgreSQL Foreign Tables Foreign tables define the structure of the remote data A foreign table can be used in queries just like a normal table but a foreign table has no storage in the PostgreSQL server Whenever it is used PostgreSQL asks the foreign data wrapper to fetch data from the external source or transmit data to the external source in the case of update commands Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Fields for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables In the Fields tab just simply click a field for editing A right click displays the pop up menu or using the field toolbar you can create new and drop the selected field To search a field name choose Edit gt Find or press CTRL F Button Description O w Add Ficld Add a field to the table
240. lect the underlying data type of the domain from the drop down list 114 Dimensions The dimensions of array specifiers Length and Scale Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Scale edit box to define the number of digits after the decimal point if required for the selected data type Collate The collation of the domain Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Default The DEFAULT clause specifies a default value for columns of the domain data type The value is any variable free expression but subqueries are not allowed The data type of the default expression must match the data type of the domain If no default value is specified then the default value is the null value The default expression will be used in any insert operation that does not specify a value for the column If a default value is defined for a particular column it overrides any default associated with the domain In turn the domain default overrides any default value associated with the underlying data type Not null Values of this domain are not allowed to be null Owner The owner of the domain function The user who defines a domain becomes its owner Note Support from PostgreSQL 7 4 or later Checks The Checks tab is provided for managing domain checks It allows you to create new edit or delete the selected check CHECK clauses specify integrity constraints or tests which values of the domain must satis
241. lgorithm is used Auto Increment The AUTO INCREMENT attribute can be used to generate a unique identity for new rows To start with the AUTO INCREMENT value other than 1 you can set that value in Options tab SQLite Table Indexes Index provides a faster access path to table data It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL statement execution on that table In the Indexes tab just simply click an index field for editing By using the index toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected index field Button Description S O a Add Index Add an index to the table Fia Delete Index Delete the selected index Use the Name edit box to set the index name To include field s in the index just simply double click the Fields or click L to open the editor for editing Unique All values of the indexed column s must only occur once Fields Editor Select the field s from the Name list You can also use the arrow buttons to change the index field s order Collation To define a collating sequence used for text entries in that column The default collating sequence is the collating sequence defined for that column BINARY Compares string data using memcmp regardless of text encoding 134 NOCASE The same as binary except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower case equivalents before the comparison is performed Note that only ASCII characters are case folded
242. lick to open the editor for editing Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 5 or later Has Oids Check this option if you want to specify whether rows of the new table should have OIDs object identifiers assigned to them Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 5 or later PostgreSQL Views Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of relations tables as if it were a single table and limiting their access to just that Views can also be used to restrict access to rows a subset of a particular table Click p i to open an object list for View You can create a view shortcut by right click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without activating the main Navicat Button Description S LELE Preview the result of the view G Explain Show the Query Plan of the view Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or In a New Tab 108 View Builder Available only in Full Version View Builder allows you to build views visually It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL See Query Builder for details Definition You can edit the view definition as SQL statement SELECT statement it implements
243. licy You can check this option to force password to follow password policy of SQL Server Enforce Password Expiration You can check this option to force password to have expiry date User Must Change Password at Next Login You can check this option to force user to change password every time when login Default Database select the default database when login Default Language Select the default display language when login Windows Authentication Default Database select the default database when login Default Language Select the default display language when login Mapped to Certificate Certificate Name ee menmanna Mapped to Asymmetric Asymmetric Key Name Note SQL Server contains features that enable you to create and manage certificates and keys for use with the server and database You can use externally generated certificates or SQL Server can generate certificates Certificates and asymmetric keys are both ways to use asymmetric encryption There is no difference between the two mechanisms for the cryptographic algorithm and no difference in strength given the same key length Enabled Check to enable the login Credential You can add credential on specific role for this login A credential is a record that contains the authentication information credentials required to connect to a resource outside SQL Server This information is used internally by SQL Server General Properties for SQL Azure
244. ll be converted to strings Please check the description of the implementation language of the trigger function about how the trigger arguments are accessible within the function it may be different from normal function arguments Constraint Deferrable The constraint can be deferred INITIALLY IMMEDIATE The constraint is checked after each statement INITIALLY DEFERRED The constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction Referenced Table Schema and Referenced Table Name The schema and the name of another table referenced by the constraint PostgreSQL Trigger Functions Trigger Function can be created with PL pgSQL and referenced within a PostgreSQL trigger definition The term trigger function is a simply a way of referring to a function that is intended to be invoked by a trigger Triggers define operations that are performed when a specific event occurs within the database A PL pgSQL trigger function can be referenced by a trigger as the operation to be performed when the trigger s event occurs 123 The definition of a trigger and the definition of its associated trigger function are two different things A trigger is defined with the SQL CREATE TRIGGER command whereas trigger functions are defined using the SQL CREATE FUNCTION command Click aS gt Trigger Function to open an object list for Trigger Function See Triggers for details Definition Definition consists of a valid SQL procedure statement Thi
245. ll be transferred only with and as part of the sale or transfer of the whole Studio and not separately You may retain no copies of the Software You may not sell or transfer any Trial Demo Version Non commercial Lite Version or Not For Resale Version of the Software e Unless otherwise provided herein you may not modify the Software or create derivative works based upon the Software f Non commercial Versions of the Software may not be used for or distributed to any party for any commercial purpose g Unless otherwise provided herein you shall not A in the aggregate install or use more than one copy of the Trial Demo Version and Non commercial Lite Version of the Software download the Trial Demo Version and Non commercial Lite Version of the Software under more than one username alter the contents of a hard drive or computer system to enable the use of the Trial Demo Version of the Software for an aggregate period in excess of the trial period for one license to such Trial Demo Version disclose the results of software performance benchmarks obtained using the Trial Demo Version or Non commercial Lite Version to any third party without PremiumSoft prior written consent or use the Trial Demo Version of the Software for a purpose other than the sole purpose of determining whether to purchase a license to a commercial or education version of the software provided however notwithstanding the foregoing you are
246. lly to fit its contents 216 Bring to Front Bring the note to the foreground Send to Back Move the note to the background Create Images To create a new image click the al button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas Then select an image file in the Open dialog box The pop up menu options of the image object in canvas include Reset Size Reset the size of the image to its original size Reset Aspect Ratio Maintain image original width to height ratio Cut Remove the image from the diagram and put it on the clipboard Copy Copy the image from the diagram to the clipboard Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram Select All Images Select all the images in the diagram Delete Delete an image from the diagram Bring to Front Bring the image to the foreground Send to Back Move the image to the background Create Shapes To create a new shape line arrow rectangle ellipse user database cloud or trigger click the button from the diagram toolbar and choose the type of shape Then click anywhere on the canvas To show hide the linked name label simply check uncheck the Show Name option in Properties pane 217 The pop up menu options of the shape in canvas include Reset Aspect Ratio only for rectangle ellipse user database cloud trigger server desktop and mobile Maintain shape original width to height ratio Cut Remove
247. m Output Schema and Output The function that converts data from the type s internal form to its external textual form Length A numeric constant that specifies the length in bytes of the new type s internal representation The default assumption is that it is variable length Variable Check this option if the type length is unknown Default The default value for the data type If this is omitted the default is null Element The type being created is an array this specifies the type of the array elements Delimiter The delimiter character to be used between values in arrays made of this type 126 Alignment The storage alignment requirement of the data type If specified it must be char int2 int4 or double the default is int4 Storage The storage strategy for the data type If specified must be plain external extended or main the default is plain Pass by value Indicate that values of this data type are passed by value rather than by reference Owner The owner of the type Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later Advanced Properties for Base Type The Advanced tab is supported from PostgreSQL 7 4 or later Receive Schema and Receive The function that converts data from the type s external binary form to its internal form Send Schema and Send The function that converts data from the type s internal form to its external binary form Analyze Schema and Analyze The function th
248. me 1 MARY 7 MARIA 9 MARGARET 12 NANCY 16 SANDRA 19 RUTH 38 MARTHA 40 AMANDA 44 MARIE customer_id lastname SMITH MILLER MOORE THOMAS MARTIN MARTINEZ GONZALEZ CARTER TURNER y gt Cancel Hint To remove the filter results right click anywhere on the grid and select Show All Copy Data from Navicat Data that being copied from Navicat goes into the windows clipboard with the fields delimited by tabs and the records delimited by carriage returns It allows you to easily paste the clipboard contents into any application you want Spreadsheet applications in general will notice the tab character between the fields and will neatly separate the clipboard data into rows and columns To select data using Keyboard Shortcuts CTRL A Toggles the selection of all rows and columns in a data grid SHIFT ARROW Toggle the selection of cells as you move up down left right in the data grid To select data using Mouse Actions e Select the desired records by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on each row e Select a block of cells Note After you have selected the desired records just simply press CTRL C or right click and select the ES Copy from the pop up menu 191 Paste Data into Navicat Data is copied into the clipboard will be arranged as below format e Data is arranged into rows and column e Rows and columns are delimited by carriage returns tab respectively e Columns in the clipboard h
249. me Type Addr 1 String Addr 2 String City Company Contact Country orders DB eg E Name Type AmountPaid Double Custo EmpNo Integer Freight Double ItemsTotal Double OrderNo Double PaymentMethod String PO String SaleDate DateTime ShipDate DateTime ShipToAddri String ShipToAddr2 String ShipToCity String ShipToContact String ShipToCountry String ShipToPhone String ShipToState String ShipToZip String ShipVIA String TaxRate Double Terms String CustNo FAX LastInvoiceDate DateTime Phone String State String TaxRate Double Zip String 252 Report Query Wizard You can select data from your database using an SQL query This functionality is provided via query based dataviews which can be visually created using the Query Wizard and visually maintained using the Query Designer To open the Query Wizard select File gt New under Data tab and double click the Query Wizard icon 1 Select the tables for the query If you select more than one table it will pop up the Join dialog for selecting the field join Select the fields for the query Add calculated fields to the query Select common field for grouping Set searching criteria for the query Set the order for the query NOR OD Enter the query data pipeline name Report Query Designer The Query Designer is used to modify query based dataviews created by Query
250. moved to the next page in the report relative to the PageBreak object s top position A PaintBox Create a paintbox area for drawing Report Tree This tool window is dockable on the left and right sides of the Report Designer It can be used to organize components within each band Components selected in the Report Tree are selected in the report layout The upper portion of the Report Tree shows the main report object and any subreports nested within it This feature can be helpful for organizing your subreports Report Tree a E Report Parameters 4 Design Layers Foreground 4 Title A Labeli a a Header g Linel A 1l in lt El Appearance A Border TppBord Pen TPen Position IpTop Style lsSingle Visible Weight 1 5 El Identity UserName Line ing Data Tree This tool window is dockable on the left and right sides of the Report Designer It can be used to create components within any band Simply select a set of fields and drag the selection into the band A set of corresponding data aware components will be created 258 In the top tree view of Data tab it contains a list of data pipelines to which the report has access In the bottom list view all of the fields for the currently selected data pipeline are displayed Fields can be selected from the bottom list view and dragged to any part of the report layout The data aware component that is appropriate for the given field will then
251. mum Determine the minimum value a sequence can generate Maximum Determine the maximum value for the sequence Cache Specify how many sequence numbers are to be preallocated and stored in memory for faster access Cycled This option allows the sequence to wrap around when the maxvalue or minvalue has been reached by an ascending or descending sequence respectively If the limit is reached the next number generated will be the minvalue maxvalue respectively Otherwise any calls to nextval after the sequence has reached its maximum value will return an error Add owned by Choose the Owned by table and Owned by column so that the sequence is associated with a specific table column such that if that column or its whole table is dropped the sequence will be automatically dropped as well The specified table must have the same owner and be in the same schema as the sequence Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later 121 PostgreSQL Triggers Triggers are database operations that are automatically performed when a specified database event occurs Click ws gt Trigger to open an object list for Trigger See Triggers for details General Properties Constraint Check this box to create a constraint trigger Trigger Type Choose the type of the trigger Table or View Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 0 or later Table name or View name Choose a table or view BEFORE The trigger can be specified to fire before
252. n If existing table is highlighted it will be checked automatically and assigned a default file name and location The file extension in the Export to text box changes according to the selected export type in step 1 Note For exporting query result ensure the query is saved before running the Export Wizard Otherwise no source table displayed in here Source Export to A FS film_text O inventory O language O payment O rental O staff v store C Users siuha Desktop store txt _ eo actor_info _ co customer _list C oo film_list o0 nicer_but_slower_film_list C eo sales_by_film_category co sales_by_store C Users siuha Desktop sales_by_store txt C oo staff_list X naand Select All Unselect All lt lt lt Back Next gt gt gt Cancel Export selected to same file Export selected to same folder In Vista or above you can select unselect all source tables from Select All button If you are exporting selected tables into the same target file you can select Export selected to same file from Select All button for quick mapping If you are exporting selected tables into the same directory you can select Export selected to same folder from Select All button for quick mapping Click Advanced button for more settings Encoding Select the encoding for the exported file Add timestamp Check this option if you want your file name specifies the timestamp of the export is run
253. n Indicate that the trigger should not be executed when a replication agent modifies the table that is involved in the trigger Note SQL Azure does not support With Append Specify that an additional trigger of an existing type should be added Note SQL Azure does not support Definition 170 This tab will appear when the Definition Type is set to SQL Statement in General tab or when connecting to SQL Azure Enter valid SQL statements SQL Server Backup Devices During a backup operation on a SQL Server database the backed up data the backup is written to a physical backup device This physical backup device is initialized when the first backup in a media set is written to it The backups on a set of one or more backup devices compose a single media set Click aS gt Backup Device to open an object list for Backup Device General Properties Name Enter the name of the backup device Type The type of the backup device DISK Physical name Specify the physical file name or path of the backup device SQL Server Linked Servers A linked server configuration enables SQL Server to execute commands against OLE DB data sources on remote servers Click ASS gt Linked Server to open an object list for Linked Server Linked servers offer the following advantages e Remote server access e The ability to issue distributed queries updates commands and transactions on heterogeneous data sources across the ente
254. n Table Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data directly without activating the main Navicat 34 To empty a table right click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop up menu This option is only applied when you wish to clear all the existing records without resetting the auto increment value To reset the auto increment value while emptying your table use Truncate Table MySQL MariaDB Table Fields In the Fields tab just simply click a field for editing A right click displays the pop up menu or using field toolbar you can create new insert move and drop the selected field To search a field name choose Edit gt Find or press CTRL F Button Description O Z OZ OoOO o w AdaEiecid Add a field to the table Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field Note Support from MySQL 3 22 or later S Delete Field Delete the selected field A Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key Move Up Move Down Move the selected field up down Note Support from MySQL 4 0 1 or later To add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields you can right click and select the Duplicate Field from the pop up menu Use the Name edit box to set the field name Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names in the table The Type drop down list defines the type of the field data See
255. n is on Navicat will prompt you to save new queries or profiles every time when you quit the relevant Ssub window Docking Open Windows Open new windows to main window or dock window or as a new window Code Insight Available only in Full Version Use Code Completion When you type the dot symbol between the object names SQL Editor will offer you a pop up list that showing some variants for the code completion see Code Completion Delay You can change the time the pop up list takes to appear 294 Use Word Completion When you type the first character of words SQL Editor will offer you a pop up list that showing some variants for the word completion Delay You can change the time the pop up list takes to appear Use Syntax Highlighting Syntax highlight helps viewing codes clearly Codes are highlighted in SQL Editor with different colors and fonts according to the categories they belong to The syntax highlighting feature can be limited by setting the maximum file size e g 10 in Apply Syntax Highlighting for statement size below MB to increase performance Auto Save Use Auto Save Save automatically after modifications in SQL Editor by defining the Auto Save Interval s e g 30 Appearance Options Show toolbar caption Show text on toolbar buttons in sub windows Otherwise only buttons will be presented Hint Restart Navicat to take effect File Edit View Window Help S BYE amp Show main tool
256. n to enable RPC to the given server Promotion of Distributed Transactions for RPC Use this option to protect the actions of a server to server procedure through a Microsoft Distributed Transaction Coordinator MS DTC transaction Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later SQL Server Server Triggers A server trigger can be a DDL or logon trigger for current server DDL triggers execute in response to a variety of data definition language DDL events These events primarily correspond to Transact SQL CREATE ALTER and DROP statements and certain system stored procedures that perform DDL like operations Logon triggers fire in response to 173 the LOGON event that is raised when a user sessions is being established Click aS gt Server Trigger to open an object list for Server Trigger Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later General Properties Trigger Type Choose the trigger type Enable Check this option to enable the trigger SQL Statement Specify additional criteria in Definition tab Assembly Specify the method of an assembly to bind with the trigger Events Check the DDL event from the list Advanced Properties Caller Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the caller of the module Self Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the specified user is the person creating or altering the module User Specify the statements inside
257. nd Clustered Indexes Ignore duplicate key values A warning message will occur when duplicate key values are inserted into a unique index Only the rows violating the uniqueness constraint will fail Recompute statistics Enable automatic statistics updating Allow row locks Row locks are allowed when accessing the index The Database Engine determines when row locks are used Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Allow page locks Page locks are allowed when accessing the index The Database Engine determines when page locks are used Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Fill Factor Specify a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of each index page during index creation or rebuild Note SQL Azure does not support Pad Index The percentage of free space that is specified by fillfactor is applied to the intermediate level pages of the index Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Sort in tempdb Specify to store temporary sort results in tempdb 164 Note SQL Azure does not support Online Long term table locks are not held for the duration of the index operation Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure Max degree of parallelism Override the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration of the index operation Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Storage Properties for Nonclustered and
258. nd choose Collaborate with 2 Click Apply after changes Note If you are the Owner or Admin you can click the x button to remove the member Quit a project 1 Right click a project and choose Quit Project Move Copy a connection to Navicat Cloud 1 Right click a connection under My Connections and choose Move Connection to or Copy Connection to 2 Select an existing project or create a new project 3 The connection will move or copy to Navicat Cloud And all its query files will store in Navicat Cloud Move Copy a connection to My Connections 1 Right click a connection under Navicat Cloud and choose Move Connection to or Copy Connection to gt My Connections 2 The connection will move or copy to My Connections Move a model to Navicat Cloud 1 Select a model file under My Connections 2 Drag and drop the model file to a project in Navicat Cloud Move a model to My Connections 1 Select a model file in a project under Navicat Cloud 2 Drag and drop the model file to My Connections View the cloud usage 22 1 Choose File gt Navicat Cloud from the main menu Note A connection a query a model or a virtual group counts for one unit Change your avatar 1 Choose File gt Navicat Cloud from the main menu 2 Click the image 3 Choose an image file Manage your Navicat Cloud account 1 Choose File gt Navicat Cloud from the main menu 2 Click your email and choose Manage Account 3 A
259. nection details of the server but the actual names and values are dependent on the server s foreign data wrapper Server Type Specify the server type Server Version Specify the server version Owner The owner of the foreign server User Mappings Name The name of an existing user that is mapped to foreign server Options Specify the options of the user mapping The options typically define the actual user name and password of the Mapping PostgreSQL Languages Language can register a new procedural language with a PostgreSQL database Subsequently functions and trigger procedures can be defined in this new language The user must have the PostgreSQL superuser privilege to register a new language Click aS gt Language to open an object list for Language Note The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later 130 General Properties Owner The owner of the language Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 3 or later Schema of handler and Handler Call Handler is the name of a previously registered function that will be called to execute the procedural language functions The call handler for a procedural language must be written in a compiled language such as C with version 1 call convention and registered with PostgreSQL as a function taking no arguments and returning the Janguage_handler type a placeholder type that is simply used to identify the function as a call handler Schema of validator and Vali
260. ng column s name and type Each field in a row is implicitly correlated with each other field in that row Click E to open an object list for Table To create a new table click the New Table from the object list toolbar together with the down arrow to choose the type Normal Foreign When open a table with graphical fields right click a table and select the EN Open Table Quick from the pop up menu Faster performance for opening the graphical table as BLOB fields images will not be loaded until you click on the cell If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table use Open Table You can create a table shortcut by right click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data directly without activating the main Navicat To empty a table right click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop up menu This option is only applied when you wish to clear all the existing records without resetting the auto increment value To reset the auto increment value while emptying your table use Truncate Table 93 PostgreSQL Normal Tables Tables are the basic unit of data storage in a PostgreSQL database Data is stored in rows and columns You define a table with a table name and set of columns PostgreSQL Table Fields In the Fields tab just simply click a field
261. ng the following security context Set the Remote Login and Password Advanced Properties Connect Timeout Define the time out value for connecting to a linked server Query Timeout Define the time out value for queries against a linked server 172 Data Access Check this option to enable a linked server for distributed query access Collation Compatible If this option is checked SQL Server assumes that all characters in the linked server are compatible with the local server with regard to character set and collation sequence or sort order This enables SQL Server to send comparisons on character columns to the provider Use Remote Collation If this option is checked the collation of remote columns is used for SQL Server data sources and the collation specified in collation name is used for non SQL Server data sources Collation Specify the name of the collation used by the remote data source if Use Remote Collation is checked and the data source is not a SQL Server data source The name must be one of the collations supported by SQL Server Lazy Schema Validation If this option is checked skip schema checking of remote tables at the beginning of the query Publisher Check this option to enable publisher Subscriber Check this option to enable subscriber Distributor Check this option to enable distributor RPC Check this option to enable RPC from the given server RPC Out Check this optio
262. nique name To set field s as unique just simply double click the Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing ON CONFLICT To specify an algorithm used to resolve constraint conflicts ROLLBACK When a constraint violation occurs an immediate ROLLBACK occurs thus ending the current transaction and the command aborts with a return code of SQLITE_ CONSTRAINT If no transaction is active other than the implied transaction that is created on every command then this algorithm works the same as ABORT ABORT When a constraint violation occurs the command backs out any prior changes it might have made and aborts with a return code of SQLITE CONSTRAINT But no ROLLBACK is executed so changes from prior commands within the same transaction are preserved This is the default behavior FAIL When a constraint violation occurs the command aborts with a return code SQLITE_ CONSTRAINT But any changes to the database that the command made prior to encountering the constraint violation are preserved and are not backed out For example if an UPDATE statement encountered a constraint violation on the 100th row that it attempts to update then the first 99 row changes are preserved but changes to rows 100 and beyond never occur IGNORE When a constraint violation occurs the one row that contains the constraint violation is not inserted or changed But the command continues executing normally Other rows before and after the row
263. not use Navicat Premium or other similar MySQL admin applications running on your computer to connect to the remote server directly unless the User Privileges has been configured 23 By default MySQL gives root as username and leave the password field blank Host Name IP Address A host name where the database is situated or the IP address of the server Port A TCP IP port for connecting to the database server User Name User name for connecting to the database server Password Password for connecting to the server Oracle Connection Navicat supports 2 types of Oracle server connection In Basic mode Navicat connects to Oracle through the Oracle Call Interface OCI OCI is an application programming interface that allows an application developer to use a third generation language s native procedure or function calls to access the Oracle database server and control all phases of SQL statement execution OCI is a library of standard database access and retrieval functions in the form of a dynamic link library In TNS mode Navicat connects to Oracle server using an alias entry from a tnsnames ora file through the Oracle Call Interface OCI OCI is an application programming interface that allows an application developer to use a third generation language s native procedure or function calls to access the Oracle database server and control all phases of SQL statement execution OCI is a library of standard database access and
264. ns that are automatically performed when a specified database event occurs Click F to open an object list for Trigger See Triggers for details General Properties Trigger Type Define the trigger type TABLE or VIEW Table name or View name Choose a table or view BEFORE The trigger can be specified to fire before the operation is attempted on a row AFTER The trigger can be specified to fire after the operation is attempted on a row INSTEAD OF The trigger can be specified to fire instead of the operation is attempted on a row When Specify the trigger condition for the database to fire the trigger 141 Insert The trigger is activated whenever adding a row to a table Delete The trigger is activated whenever removing a row from the table Update The trigger is activated whenever changing a value in one of the fields selected in Update Of Fields Update Of Fields Specify the fields for UPDATE statement trigger upon necessary Definition You can edit valid SQL statements in the trigger definition inside BEG N and END SQL Server Objects To start working with the server objects you should create and open a connection If the server is empty you need to right click the connection in the Connection pane and choose New Database to create a new database Note SQL Azure does not support Comment tab General Properties for SQL Azure Database Name Define the name of the database Edition C
265. nt is not enforced when replication agents perform insert update or delete operations Note SQL Azure does not support Definition Type in the definition for the check constraint Comment Specify the comment of the check Note SQL Azure does not support SQL Server Table Triggers A trigger is a special kind of stored procedure that automatically executes when an event occurs in the database server In the Triggers tab just simply click a trigger field for editing By using the trigger toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected trigger field Button Description S Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table e Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger 157 Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name Use the Fires drop down list to define the trigger action time AFTER Specify that the DML trigger is fired only when all operations specified in the triggering SQL statement have executed successfully INSTEAD OF Specify that the DML trigger is executed instead of the triggering SQL statement therefore overriding the actions of the triggering statements Insert The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table Update The trigger is activated whenever a row Is modified Delete The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table Enable You can choose whether to enable disable the trigger constraint by checking unchecking the box
266. nu option from the Report Designer g HP LaserJet M1522 series PCL6 Class Driver HP LaserJet M1522 series PCL6 Class Driver Copies Number of copies Enter page numbers and or page ranges o E separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Print to File Type PDF File Where C Wsers mayho Documents Report pdf The Page Setup dialog can be accessed from the File gt Page Setup menu option of the Report Designer You can set the printer page size paper source layout and margins properties from within the Page Setup dialog 264 x Printer Paper Size Paper Source Layout Margins The Groups dialog is accessible via the Report gt Groups menu option of the Report Designer You can separate your report into different sections using groups A number of options are available to control the behavior of each group For example you may want each group to start on a new page or to reprint the group header when the group continues on additional pages Another powerful feature is the Keep group together option which can be used to ensure that all of the information for a group fits on a page Data Field Custom Field plOrders CustNo_2 v On Group Change _ Start new page C Create new file Reset page number _ Email new file C Start on odd page New page when less than bo V Keep group together P
267. o Check All s M AITETA TAM F aada A AANA COCO LIAR ARI Na J A MeRi Uncheck AIl Run Query Checked Scripts Detail Click Run Query button to execute the selected query Backup Restore Available only in Full Version A secure and reliable server is closely related to performing regular backups as failures will probably occur sometimes caused by attacks hardware failure human error power outages etc Navicat allows you to backup restore database objects for your database You can save your settings as a profile for setting schedule Click eJ to open an object list for Backup Hint Backup files are stored under Settings Location To open the folder right click the backup file and choose Open Containing Folder Note Available only for MySQL PostgreSQL SQLite and MariaDB To backup Oracle see Oracle Data Pump To backup SQL Server see SQL Server Backup Restore 245 Backup General Properties You can enter comment for the backup file Object Selection Choose database objects you wish to backup Advanced Properties The following options depend on the database type you are chosen MySQL PostgreSQL SQLite and MariaDB Compressed Check this option if you want to produce smaller backup file To compress or decompress the backup file in the Object List pane right click the backup file and select Compress Backup or Decompress Backup from the pop up menu Hint compressed psc uncompressed psb
268. o a variety of data definition language DDL events These events primarily correspond to Transact SQL CREATE ALTER and DROP statements and certain system stored procedures that perform DDL like operations Click dh gt Database Trigger to open an object list for Database Trigger Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab General Properties Trigger Type Trigger type must be Database Trigger Enable Check this option to enable the trigger SQL Statement Specify additional criteria in Definition tab Note SQL Azure does not support 175 Assembly Specify the method of an assembly to bind with the trigger Note SQL Azure does not support Events Check the DDL event from the list Advanced Properties Caller Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the caller of the module Self Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the specified user is the person creating or altering the module User Specify the statements inside the module execute in the context of the user Encrypted Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement Note SQL Azure does not support Definition This tab will appear when the Definition Type is set to SQL Statement in General tab Enter valid SQL statements SQL Server Partition Functions A partition function is a function in the current database tha
269. ole can add other logins to that same role 2 9 Application Role An application role is a database principal that enables an application to run with its own user like permissions You can use application roles to enable access to specific data to only those users who connect through a particular application Unlike database roles application roles contain no members and are inactive by default SQL Server Login Designer General Properties for SQL Server 2000 Login Name Set name for login Authentication Type Select the authentication type SQL Server Authentication Windows Authentication Enabled Check to enable the login Password Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Specify Old Password Check this option to enter the old password used by this account Default Database Select the default database when login Default Language Select the default display language when login Default Database Select the default database when login Default Language Select the default display language when login General Properties for SQL Server 2005 or later Login Name Set name for login Authentication Type Select the authentication type SQL Server Authentication Password 280 Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Specify Old Password Check this option to enter the old password used by this account Enforce Password Po
270. ommands within the same transaction are preserved This is the default behavior FAIL When a constraint violation occurs the command aborts with a return code SQLITE CONSTRAINT But any changes to the database that the command made prior to encountering the constraint violation are preserved and are not backed out For example if an UPDATE statement encountered a constraint violation on the 100th row that it attempts to update then the first 99 row changes are preserved but changes to rows 100 and beyond never occur 133 IGNORE When a constraint violation occurs the one row that contains the constraint violation is not inserted or changed But the command continues executing normally Other rows before and after the row that contained the constraint violation continue to be inserted or updated normally No error is returned when the IGNORE conflict resolution algorithm is used REPLACE When a UNIQUE constraint violation occurs the pre existing rows that are causing the constraint violation are removed prior to inserting or updating the current row Thus the insert or update always occurs The command continues executing normally following REPLACE No error is returned by the REPLACE conflict resolution If a NOT NULL constraint violation occurs the NULL value is replaced by the default value for that column If the column has no default value then the ABORT algorithm is used If a CHECK constraint violation occurs then the IGNORE a
271. on It has already included in Navicat installation folder You can locate it directly Hint Restart Navicat to take effect SQL Plus Specify the location for SQL Plus used in console of Oracle connection SQL Plus is included in Oracle Client Oracle Instant Client Oracle Instant Client is the simplest way to deploy a full Oracle Client application built with OCI OCCI JOBC OCI or ODBC drivers It provides the necessary Oracle Client libraries in a small set of files You can also download Oracle Client Oracle Instant Client through Oracle Client http www oracle com technetwork database enterprise edition downloads index html Oracle Instant Client http www oracle com technetwork database features instant client index 097480 html Download the appropriate Instant Client packages for your platform and the CPU All installations REQUIRE the Basic or Basic Lite package Unzip the packages and set the path points to it Oracle Client Installation Guide http download oracle com docs cd B28359 _01 install 111 b32302 toc htm 302 Commands Available only in Full Version Navicat Server ie Command Lines Objects navicat exe backup ProfileName u NavicatID t ConnectionType c ConnectionName d DatabaseName s SchemaName Backup a PostgreSQL SQLite and MariaDB navicat exe import ProfileName u NavicatID t ConnectionType c ConnectionName d DatabaseName s SchemaName Export View
272. on Set the number of digits in the year Unit Set the unit either in BYTE or CHAR Object Schema Set the object schema for the field type Object Type Set the object type for the field 60 Oracle Table Indexes Indexes are optional structures associated with tables and clusters You can create indexes on one or more columns of a table to soeed SQL statement execution on that table An Oracle Database index provides a faster access path to table data Indexes are the primary means of reducing disk I O when properly used You can create many indexes for a table as long as the combination of columns differs for each index You can create more than one index using the same columns if you specify distinctly different combinations of the columns In the Indexes tab just simply click an index field for editing By using the index toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected index field Button Description S O a Add Index Add an index to the table Fia Delete Index Delete the selected index Use the Name edit box to set the index name To include field s in the index just simply double click the Fields field or click L to open the editor for editing Index Type Define the type of the table index Non unique Non unique indexes do not impose the restriction of unique indexes on the column values Unique Unique indexes guarantee that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the key column or
273. ons executed over databases and database objects in Navicat Select Tools gt History Log from the main menu or press CTRL H to open the LogHistory txt file in the History Log Viewer Note This log will be overwritten while Navicat is being restarted Loglmport txt Record detailed information on every error indicating success or failure that occurred during the import process Note This log will be overwritten on each import LogExport txt Record detailed information on every error indicating success or failure that occurred during the export process Note This log will be overwritten on each export LogSynchronize txt Record detailed information on every error indicating success or failure that occurred during the data synchronization process Note This log will be overwritten on each synchronization LogCmd ixt Store information for Navicat command line process and all operations while running schedule 308
274. ons in the database including calling other procedures e Return a status value to a calling procedure or batch to indicate success or failure and the reason for failure Note SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab Function Wizard Click the New Function from the object list toolbar The Function Wizard will pop up and it allows you to create a procedure function easily You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new procedure function 1 Specify the Name of the routine and select the type of the routine Procedure or Function 2 Define the parameter s of the procedure Set the parameter Name Type Schema Type Default Value Output and or Read Only under corresponding columns 3 If you create a function select the Function type from the drop down list Then choose the Schema and the Return Type from the list if necessary 4 Set the advanced options Option Description Encryption The database will convert the CREATE statement to an obfuscated format Recompile Instruct the database not to cache a plan for the procedure Pers sce erea O O O Schema binding The function is bound to the database objects that it references pone e Execute As Specify the runtime user of the function D store rir welt For replication Stored procedures created for replication cannot be executed on the Subscriber Hint Once uncheck the Show wizard next time you can go to Options to enable it NULL on NULL Input Indicate
275. option and enter the name of existing batch job if you want to append the details to the existing batch jobs in Navicat Premium Click Start button to start the import process Dump SQL File Execute SQL File Navicat allows you to backup and restore your database schema table s using the Dump SQL File and Execute SQL File features To backup your database schema table s right click it and select Dump SQL File gt Structure And Data or Structure Only from the pop up menu 250 To restore your database schema table s or execute SQL file right click and select Execute SQL File from the pop up menu Hint You can drag a sql file to the table object list or a database schema in the Connection pane Navicat will pop up the Execute SQL File window Print Database Schema Table Structure Available only in Full Version Navicat allows you to view and print database schema and table structures Right click the database schema table s and select Print Database or Print Schema or 4 Print Tables from the pop up menu Console Console allows you to use a command line interface In other words it provides interactive text based screen for you to query input and result output from database Open the connection and select Tools gt oa Console from the main menu or press F6 Hint You are allowed to open multiple console windows which each represents different connection Note For Oracle server you have to have
276. or The commutator of this operator Schema of negator and Negator The negator of this operator Hash The operator can support a hash join if this option on Merge The operator can support a merge join if this option on Additional Advanced Properties for PostgreSQL Version below 8 3 Schema of left sort operator and Left sort operator lf this operator can support a merge join the left sort operator that sorts the left hand data type of this operator Schema of right sort operator and Right sort operator lf this operator can support a merge join the right sort operator that sorts the right hand data type of this operator Schema of less than operator and Less than operator lf this operator can support a merge join the less than operator that compares the input data types of this operator Schema of greater than operator and Greater than operator lf this operator can support a merge join the greater than operator that compares the input data types of this operator PostgreSQL Operator Classes An operator class defines how a particular data type can be used with an index The operator class specifies that certain operators will fill particular roles or strategies for this data type and this index method The operator class also specifies the support procedures to be used by the index method when the operator class is selected for an index column All the operators and functions used by an operator class must be defined
277. orm TO_TIMESTAMP Oracle Data Pump Import Before execute the Data Pump Import click Generate SQL button to review the SQL Then you can click Execute button to run it To show the hidden tabs advanced options check the Show Advanced Options box General Properties 51 Job Name The name of the job Mode FULL In a full database export the entire database is unloaded This mode requires that you have the EXP_FULL DATABASE role TABLESPACE In tablespace mode only the tables contained in a specified set of tablespaces are unloaded If a table is unloaded its dependent objects are also unloaded Both object metadata and data are unloaded own schema TABLE In table mode only a specified set of tables partitions and their dependent objects are unloaded You must have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role to specify tables that are not in your own schema All specified tables must reside in a single schema Content SCHEMAS If you have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role then you can specify a list of schemas and optionally include the schema definitions themselves as well as system privilege grants to those schemas If you do not have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role you can export only your Unload both data and metadata DATA _ONLY Unload only table row data no database object definitions are unloaded METADATA_ONLY Unload only database object definitions no table row data is unloaded Table Exists Action Specify the ac
278. ormance Auto Shrink If this option is on the database files are candidates for periodic shrinking Auto Update Statistics Specify that the query optimizer updates statistics when they are used by a query and when they might be out of date Auto Update Statistics Asynchronously Specify that statistics updates for the AUTO _UPDATE_ STATISTICS option are asynchronous The query optimizer does not wait for statistics updates to complete before it compiles queries Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Advanced Properties Recovery for SQL Server Page Verify Discover damaged database pages caused by disk I O path errors Disk I O path errors can be the cause of database corruption problems and are generally caused by power failures or disk hardware failures that occur at the time the page is being written to disk Database page writes will not generate a CHECKSUM or TORN _PAGE_DETECTION value SQL Server will not verify a checksum or torn page during a read even if a CHECKSUM or TORN_PAGE_DETECTION value is present in the page header TORN_PAGE_DETECTION Save a specific 2 bit pattern for each 512 byte sector in the 8 kilobyte KB database page and stored in the database page header when the page is written to disk CHECKSUM Calculate a checksum over the contents of the whole page and stores the value in the page header when a page is written to disk Advanced Properties Service Broker for SQL Server Note Su
279. ortcut by right click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data directly without activating the main Navicat To empty a table right click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop up menu SQLite Table Fields In the Fields tab just simply click a field for editing A right click displays the pop up menu or using field toolbar you can create new insert move and drop the selected field To search a field name choose Edit gt Find or press CTRL F Button Description o aE Add Field Add a field to the table Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field S Delete Field Delete the selected field Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key Move Up Move Down Move the selected field up down Use the Name edit box to set the field name Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names in the table The Type drop down list defines the type storage class of the field data See SQLite 2 Data Types and SQLite 3 Data Types for details 132 Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Decimals edit box to define the number of digits after the decimal point the scale Not null Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field P Primary Key A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that
280. ote To edit the datetime just simply click and choose enter the desired data Type Primary Key A primary key materialized view 76 A rowid materialized view Master The remote rollback segment is used at the remote master site for the individual materialized view Local The remote rollback segment is used for the local refresh group that contains the materialized view Constraints Enforced Oracle Database use enforced constraints during the refresh operation Trusted Oracle Database use dimension and constraint information that has been declared trustworthy by the database administrator but that has not been validated by the database No Index Check this to suppress the creation of the default index Build Type The materialized view is to be populated immediately The materialized view is to be populated by the next refresh operation Prebuilt To register an existing table as a preinitialized materialized view Reduced Precision With To authorize the loss of precision that will result if the precision of the table or materialized view columns do not exactly match the precision returned by subquery Without To require that the precision of the table or materialized view columns match exactly the precision returned by subquery or the create operation will fail Compress Data segments are compressed to reduce disk and memory use Parallel Choose NOPARALLEL for serial execution or PARALLEL if
281. ottom Align a group of components with the bottommost position of the component that was selected first 259 H Space Horizontally Space a set of components based on the leftmost position of the first component selected and the rightmost position of the last component selected ae Space Vertically Space a set of components based on the topmost position of the first component selected and the bottommost position of the last component selected lal Center Horizontally in Band Center a component horizontally within a band Center Vertically in Band Center a component vertically within a band Size Toolbar This toolbar will assist in setting the size of components 2 Shrink Width to Smallest Determine the minimum width of all the selected components and then sets the width of the components to that value Grow Width to Largest Determine the maximum width of all the selected components and then sets the width of the components to that value Shrink Height to Smallest Determine the minimum height of all the selected components and then sets the height of the components to that value iit Grow Height to Largest Determine the maximum height of all the selected components and then sets the height of the components to that value Nudge Toolbar This toolbar will assist in setting the position of components El Nudge Down Move all selected components one pixel down E Nudge Left Move all selected components one
282. owed Advanced Properties Cursor for SQL Server Close Cursor On Commit Enabled lf this option is on any cursors open when a transaction is committed or rolled back are closed Default Cursor When LOCAL is specified and a cursor is not defined as GLOBAL when created the scope of the cursor is local to the batch stored procedure or trigger in which the cursor was created The cursor name is valid only within this scope The cursor can be referenced by local cursor variables in the batch stored procedure or trigger or a stored procedure OUTPUT parameter The cursor is implicitly deallocated when the batch stored procedure or trigger ends unless it was passed back in an OUTPUT parameter If the cursor is passed back in an OUTPUT parameter the cursor is deallocated when the last variable that references it is deallocated or goes out of scope GLOBAL When GLOBAL is specified and a cursor is not defined as LOCAL when created the scope of the cursor is global to the connection The cursor name can be referenced in any stored procedure or batch executed by the connection Advanced Properties Automatic for SQL Server 145 Auto Close If this option is on the database is shut down cleanly and its resources are freed after the last user exits Auto Create Statistics If this option is on the query optimizer creates statistics on single columns in query predicates as necessary to improve query plans and query perf
283. p 1 Select the Encoding for the source file Note For TXT and XML file you can select more than one file to import Excel Sheets will be shown in the Tables list Access If there is security settings i e database password and user level security in your access file you are required to input the necessary information Click Security button for more settings System Database File Locate the system security file of the Access file e g D Temp Security mdw 228 Database Password Enter the password for the database if any Logon Name Enter the user name set by the user level security Logon Password Enter the password of that user ODBC Setting up an ODBC Data Source Connection 1 In Control Panel select Administrative Tools Select Data Sources ODBC Click Add button in User DSN tab Select the appropriate ODBC driver such as Microsoft ODBC for Oracle and click Finish button Enter required information Click OK button to see your ODBC Driver in the list oS ee ee Connecting to ODBC Data Source in Navicat 1 Click in Import from in step 2 of the Import Wizard 2 In Provider tab select the appropriate ODBC driver such as Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers 3 Under Connection tab choose the data source from the Use data source name drop down list and provide valid username and password 4 All available tables will be included in the Tables list if connection is success Hint
284. p of columns is unique with respect to all the rows in the table In the Uniques tab just simply click an unique field for editing By using the unique toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected unique field Button Description 98 Add Unique Add an unique to the table a Delete Unique Delete the selected unique Use the Name edit box to set the unique name To set field s as unique just simply double click the Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing Tablespace The tablespace of the unique constraint s index Fill Factor The fillfactor storage parameter of the unique constraint s index Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later Deferrable The unique constraint can be deferred Deferred The unique constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction Comment Define the comment for the unique PostgreSQL Table Checks A check constraint is the most generic constraint type It allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must satisfy a Boolean truth value expression In the Checks tab just simply click a check field for editing By using the check toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected check field Button Description Add Check Add a check to the table Delete Check Delete the selected check Use the Name edit box to set the check name Check Set the condition for checking e g field _name1 gt
285. parison Result Source Objects Target Objects The tree view shows the differences between model and database schema objects after the comparison of their structures providing with the detailed SQL statements shown in the Queries for Modification list The red item represents the non existence for the other database schema The blue item represents the existence for the other database schema but different definition detected Source Objects Target Objects g a FE Tables a E Tables A o gt EE sakila category p EE sakila actor gt FEA sakila city 3 gt EEA sakila address gt EEA sakila country gt FEA sakila category a 55 sakila customer 3 gt FA sakila city ob Fields gt FA sakila country gt P Primary Keys a Eq sakila customer b amp Foreign Keys 3 2 b Fields b AA Indexes 2 b gt P Primary Keys op g Triggers a amp Foreign Keys gt EEA sakila film be fk customer address FOREIGN KEY add gt EES sakila film_actor 2 2 O fk_customer_store FOREIGN KEY store_i gt EER sakila film_category 2 b HA Indexes b Ef sakila film_text gt g Triggers gt FEA sakila inventory wl liz B gt E New Items EE tems Altered All the scripts are unchecked in the Queries for Modification list by default Check the scripts you want to apply to the target You can highlight multiple lines of scripts and then right click to show the pop up menu Choose Checked Scripts Detail to view the f
286. pixel to the left 260 Nudge Right Move all selected components one pixel to the right Draw Toolbar This toolbar will assist in setting the colors and borders of components SA Fill Color For shapes lines and region components only Set the Brush Color property To set the color of a textual component check the Highlight Color action of the Format toolbar J Line Color For shapes lines and region components only Set the Pen Color property T Gradient For use with a Shape component only Set the Gradient property Line Thickness For use with a Line component only Set the Weight property For use with a Line component only Set the Pen Style property Edit Toolbar This toolbar will assist in setting the most important property or properties for the currently selected component No component selected Se Data aware component selected This configuration allows the data pipeline and data field for the component to be set The drop down list on the left shows the data pipeline The drop down list on the right shows the field name Addr2 A AmountPaid City Company Contact Cost Country CustNo CustNo_2 Description Label component selected Here a label component has been selected in the Report Designer The Edit toolbar displays an edit box from which the label s caption can be set 261 Cust No Shape component selected Here a shape component has been
287. pport from SQL Server 2005 or later Broker Enabled Specify that Service Broker is enabled for the specified database Message delivery is started and the is broker_enabled flag is set to true in the sys databases catalog view The database retains the existing Service Broker identifier 146 Honor Broker Priority Send operations take into consideration the priority levels that are assigned to conversations Messages from conversations that have high priority levels are sent before messages from conversations that are assigned low priority levels Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Advanced Properties Change Tracking for SQL Server Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Change Tracking Enabled Enable change tracking for the database Retention Period Specify the minimum period for keeping change tracking information in the database Data is removed only when Auto Clean Up is checked Auto Clean Up Change tracking information is automatically removed after the specified retention period Advanced Properties Miscellaneous for SQL Server Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later Cross Database Ownership Chaining Enabled If this option is on database can be the source or target of a cross database ownership chain Trustworthy If this option is on database modules for example user defined functions or stored procedures that use an impersonation context can access resources outside the dat
288. presented by a tab in the model To create a new diagram choose File gt Ea New Diagram from the model s menu Create Tables To create a new table click the EEE button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas To add an existing table from the Explorer s Model tab simply drag and drop the selected table from the Model tab to the canvas For Default diagram notation the P icon means the field is a primary key The icon indicates that the field serves as an index Note If you right click a field you can choose to add insert delete rename field and set the field as primary key The pop up menu options of the table object in canvas include Design Table Edit the table structure in a designer e g fields indexes foreign keys etc The tabs and options in the designer depend on the diagram database type you are chosen For the settings of different tabs see Server Objects Add Related Objects Add all related tables views to the selected table Add Field Add fields to the existing table Cut Remove the table from the diagram and put it on the clipboard Copy Copy the table from the diagram to the clipboard 212 Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram Select All Tables Select all the tables in the diagram Delete Delete a table from the diagram or from both diagram and model Rename Change the name of the table Color Change the color of the table S
289. ption if you want MySQL to maintain a live checksum for all rows Note Aria table is supported from MariaDB 5 1 or later Page Checksum only for Aria table Check this option if you want index and data use page checksums for extra safety Note Support from MariaDB 5 1 or later Transactional only for Aria table Check this option if you want crash safe Note Support from MariaDB 5 1 or later Row Format Defines how the rows should be stored Avg Row Length An approximation of the average row length for your table You need to set this only for large tables with variable size rows Max Rows The maximum number of rows you plan to store in the table This is not a hard limit but rather a hint to the storage engine that the table must be able to store at least this many rows 40 Min Rows The minimum number of rows you plan to store in the table Key Block Size This option provides a hint to the storage engine about the size in bytes to use for index key blocks The engine is allowed to change the value if necessary A value of 0 indicates that the default value should be used Pack Keys take effect only with MyISAM table Set this option to 1 if you want to have smaller indexes This usually makes updates slower and reads faster Setting the option to 0 disables all packing of keys Setting it to DEFAULT tells the storage engine to pack only long CHAR VARCHAR BINARY or VARBINARY columns Delay Key Write only
290. pty or if the entire format string is empty the value is formatted using general floating point formatting with 15 significant digits General floating point formatting is also used if the value has more than 18 digits to the left of the decimal point and the format string does not specify scientific notation Date Time fields Specifier Represent 299 The date using the format given by the ShortDateFormat global variable followed by the time using the format given by the LongTimeFormat global variable The time is not displayed if the fractional part of the DateTime value is zero dddddd The date using the format given by the LongDateFormat global variable The month as a number without a leading zero 1 12 If the m specifier immediately follows an h or hh specifier the minute rather than the month is displayed 3 The month as a number with a leading zero 01 12 If the mm specifier immediately follows an h or hh specifier the minute rather than the month is displayed mmm The month as an abbreviation Jan Dec using the strings given by the ShortMonthNames global variable mmmm The month as a full name January December using the strings given by the LongMonthNames global variable s The time using the 12 hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier followed by am for any hour before yy h hh n nn S Ss t tt am pm noon or pm for any hour after noon The am pm specifier can u
291. r File Stream Specify FILESTREAM storage for the varbinary max BLOB data Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later User Defined Type Schema Set the schema of the user defined type 153 User Defined Type set the user defined type Computed Expression Set an expression that defines the value of a computed column Persisted Specify that the SQL Server Database Engine will physically store the computed values in the table and update the values when any other columns on which the computed column depends are updated Default Set the default value for the field With Values Check this to enable the with values option Sparse Indicate that the column is a sparse column Note Support from SQL Server 2008 or later Comment Set any optional text describing the current field Note SQL Azure does not support SQL Server Table Indexes Indexes are optional structures associated with tables You can create indexes on one or more columns of a table to speed SQL statement execution on that table In the Indexes tab just simply click an index field for editing By using the index toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected index field Button Description S ls Add Index Add an index to the table Fia Delete Index Delete the selected index Use the Name edit box to set the index name To include field s in the index just simply double click the Fields field or click to open t
292. r Preview and Finish Report Design Toolbars The various toolbars accessible from the design workspace are documented in this section The toolbars are dockable The toolbars are accessible from the View gt Toolbars menu option of the Report Designer or by right clicking on the docking area at the top of the Report Designer Standard Component Toolbar 255 This toolbar will assist in creating the most commonly used report components Label Used to display text Assign the Caption property to control the text value To resize the label automatically so it fits a changing caption set the Auto Size property to True Memo Print multiple lines of plain text in a report To set the value assign a string list to the Lines property To dynamically resize the memo during printing set the Stretch property to True Use the ShiftRelativeTo property to define dynamic relationships with other stretchable objects RichText Print formatted text To set the value assign the RichT ext property or use the LoadFromFile orLoadFromRIFStream methods Use the ShiftRelativeTo property to define dynamic relationships with other stretchable objects At design time you can use the ReportBuilder s built in RTF Editor to load modify and save rich text data stored in files SystemVariable Used to display common report information such as page number page count print date and time date time etc The type of information displayed is controlled
293. r delete records Related topic sorting Finding Replacing Records Filtering Records Manipulating Raw Data Formatting Table Grid 196 Assistant Editors Navicat provides Memo Hex Image Web Dynamic Column pane to view and edit TEXT BLOB BFile fields content The editor allows you to view update insert or delete data in a table Click Memo Hex ra Image amp Web and Dynamic Column from the toolbar to activate the appropriate viewer editor Note Oracle BFile fields cannot be edited The Memo pane allows you to edit data as a simple text To change the syntax highlight simply right click the empty space and choose Language Use the button on the navigation bar to update the changed records to the table The Hex pane allows you to edit data in hexadecimal mode Use the button on the navigation bar to update the changed records to the table Note Use the INSERT key on the keyboard to switch between Insert and Overwrite modes The Image pane allows you to show data as image Use the i Load Save to disk and MM Clear button to load remove the image from a file or save the image to a file The Web pane allows you to show data with HTML codes as in a web browser The Dynamic Column pane allows you to edit data as dynamic column in MariaDB Use the and buttons on the left to add and delete values Filter Wizard Available only in Full Version Filter Wizard allows you to facilitate creating and applying fil
294. r pool lets Oracle retain the schema object in memory to avoid I O operations KEEP takes precedence over any NOCACHE clause you specify for a table cluster materialized view or materialized view log RECYCLE Choose this to put blocks from the segment into the RECYCLE pool An appropriately sized RECYCLE pool reduces the number of objects whose default pool is the RECYCLE pool from taking up unnecessary cache space Oracle Tables Relational databases use tables to store data All operations on data are done on the tables themselves or produce another table as the result A table is a set of rows and columns and their intersections are fields From a general perspective columns within a table describe the name and type of data that will be found by row for that column s fields Rows within a table represent records composed of fields that are described from left to right by their corresponding column s name and type Each field in a row is implicitly correlated with each other field in that row Click EE to open an object list for Table 58 To create a new table click the New Table from the object list toolbar together with the down arrow to choose the type Normal External Index Organized When open a table with graphical fields right click a table and select Open Table Quick from the pop up menu Faster performance for opening the graphical table as BLOB fields images will not be loaded until you click on the cell
295. r the duration of the index operation Note SQL Azure does not support SQL Server Synonyms A synonym is an alternative name for a schema scoped object Client applications can use a single part name to reference a base object by using a synonym instead of using a two part three part or four part name to reference the base object Click as gt Synonym to open an object list for Synonym Note SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab General Properties Object Linked Server The name of the server on which base object is located Note SQL Azure does not support Object Database The name of the database in which the base object is located Object Schema The name of the schema of the base object Object Type The object type 168 Object The name of the base object that the synonym references SQL Server Triggers A trigger is a special kind of stored procedure that automatically executes when an event occurs in the database server Click ae gt Trigger to open an object list for Trigger See Triggers for details Note SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab General Properties Trigger Type Choose Table or View on which the DML trigger is executed Enable Check this option to enable the trigger Table name or View name Choose a table or a view AFTER Specify that the DML trigger is fired only when all operations specified in the triggering SQL statement have executed successfully INS
296. rade names product names and logos may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners You may not remove or alter any trademark trade names product names logo copyright or other proprietary notices legends symbols or labels in the software This EULA does not authorize you to use PremiumSoft or its licensors names or any of their respective trademarks Connection To start working with your server in Navicat you should first establish a connection or several connections using the connection window If you are new to the server or Net in general and are not quite sure how things work you may want to look at e MySQL User Manual e Oracle Database Documentation e PostgreSQL User Manual e SQLite User Manual e SQL Server MSDN Library e MariaDB Documentation To create a new connection click or choose File gt New Connection Then enter the necessary information in the Connection Properties window After you have created your connections your databases schemas appear in the Connection pane If the Show objects in Connection pane option is checked at the Options window all database schema objects are also displayed in the pane To connect to a database schema simply double click it in the pane Note Navicat authorizes you to make connection to remote servers running on different platforms i e Windows Mac Linux and UNIX You can edit the connection information by right click the connection
297. re features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Result To run the package click Run on the toolbar If the SQL statement is correct the statement will be executed and if the statement is supposed to return data the DBMS Output tab opens with data returned by the package If an error occurs while executing the package execution stops the appropriate error message is displayed Select the function procedure and enter the parameter s if the function procedure has input parameter s Debug Available only in Full Version To debug the package click i Debug on the toolbar to launch the Oracle Debugger Select the function procedure and enter the parameter s if the function procedure has input parameter s You can add remove breakpoints for debugging by clicking inthe grey area beside each statement Oracle Sequences Sequence involves creating and initializing a new special single row table It is usually used to generate unique identifiers for rows of a table Click as gt Sequence to open an object list for Sequence General Properties Increment To specify which value is added to the current sequence value to create a new value A positive value will make an ascending sequence a negative one a descending sequence The default value is 1 80 Start with To specify the first sequence number to be generated Minimum The minimum value a sequence can generate Maximum The maximum value for the sequence
298. remium and Enterprise Version Model Sidebar Model Explorer Pane Model History Pane 160 160 161 163 168 169 171 171 173 174 175 176 177 177 177 177 178 183 184 184 186 186 186 188 192 194 194 195 196 197 197 200 200 202 202 206 207 207 208 208 208 209 Model Properties Pane Model Overview Pane Diagram Canvas Create Tables Create Views Create Foreign Keys Create Labels Create Notes Create Images Create Shapes Create Layers Format Diagram Preview and Print Model Reverse Engineering Script Generation General Settings for Export SQL Advanced Settings for Export SQL Forward Engineering Selecting Synchronization Type Selecting Schemas Objects and Connection Selecting Compare and Execution Options Viewing Comparison Result Model Conversion Model Hints and Tips Advanced Tools Import Wizard Setting Import File Format Step 1 Setting Source File Name Step 2 Setting Delimiter Step 3 TXT XML Setting Additional Options Step 4 TXT XML Excel HTML Setting Target Table Step 5 Adjusting Field Structures and Mapping Fields Step 6 Selecting Import Mode Step 7 Saving and Confirming Import Step 8 Export Wizard Setting Export File Format Step 1 Setting Destination File Name Step 2 Selecting Fields for Export Step 3 Setting Additional Options Step 4 Saving and Confirming Export Step 5 Data Transfer Available only in Full Version General Settings for Data Transfer 209 2
299. retrieval functions in the form of a dynamic link library By default Oracle created a number of user accounts upon installation Administrative accounts SYS SYSTEM SYSMAN and DBSNMP Sample schema accounts SCOTT HR OE OC PM IX and SH Connection Type Host Name IP Address A host name where the database is situated or the IP address of the server Port A TCP IP port for connecting to the database server Service Name SID Set the Service Name SID which the user connects when making connection Select the corresponding radio button TNS User needs to provide the Net Service Name 24 User Name User name for connecting to the database server Password Password for connecting to the server See also OCI Options PostgreSQL Connection For security reasons native remote direct connections to the PostgreSQL server are disabled Therefore you may not be able to use Navicat Premium or other similar PostgreSQL admin applications running on your computer to connect to the remote server By default PostgreSQL only allows connections from the local machine using TCP IP connections Other machines will not be able to connect unless you modify listen_addresses in the positgresq conf file enable host based authentication by modifying the PGDATA pg_hba conf file and restart the server For more information Client Authentication By default PostgreSQL gives postgres as username and leave the password fi
300. revent orphans V Reprint group headers on subsequent pages The Print to File Setup dialog is accessible via the File gt Print to File Setup menu option of the Report Designer This dialog is used to specify the format and content of the ASCII file that will be created if the report is printed to file File Name SMyDocuments Report pdf Group Header 0 CustNo_2 Group Header 1 OrderNo_2 Detail x Available Controls litan gt The Data dialog can be accessed from the Report gt Data menu option of the Report Designer It can be used to specify the data pipeline for the report 265 The Grid Options dialog is accessible via the View gt Grid Options menu of the Report Designer Use the Grid Options dialog to control how the workspace grid is drawn and whether layout elements automatically snap to the grid points The Outline Settings dialog is accessible via the Report gt Outline Settings menu option of the Report Designer Use this dialog to control the behavior of report outline generation When enabled an outline tree structure is dynamically generated by the report engine and rendered by the report previewer Create Nodes For Components Create Page Nodes cme The Find Text Settings dialog is accessible via the Report gt Find Text Settings menu option of the Report Designer Use this dialog to configure the find text op
301. rflow segment to be stored Overflow Logging Specify whether creation of a database object will be logged in the redo log file LOGGING or not NOLOGGING Overflow Physical Attributes Refer to Physical Attributes Default Storage Characteristics Oracle Views Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of relations tables as if it were a single table and limiting their access to just that Views can also be used to restrict access to rows a subset of a particular table Click p i to open an object list for View You can create a view shortcut by right click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without activating the main Navicat Button Description S O LELE r i Preview the result of the view G Explain Show the Query Plan of the view Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or In a New Tab View Builder Available only in Full Version View Builder allows you to build views visually It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL See Query Builder for details Definition You can edit the view definition as SQL statement SELECT statement it implements Hint To customize the v
302. rget database and or schema with this option is on Suppose this option is unchecked and tables already exist in the target database schema then all data will be appended to the destination tables Include indexes Include indexes in the table with this option is on Include foreign key constraints Include foreign keys in the table with this option is on Include engine table type Include table type with this option is on Include character set Include character set in the table with this option is on Include auto increment Include auto increment in the table with this option is on 237 Include other table options Include other options in the table with this option is on Include unique constraints Include uniques in the table with this option is on Include rules Include rules in the table with this option is on Include check constraints Include checks in the table with this option is on Include triggers Include triggers in the table with this option is on Include excludes Include exclusion constraints in the table with this option is on Convert object name to Check this option if you require convert object names to Lower case or Upper case during the process Insert records Check this option if you require all records to be transferred to the destination database and or schema Lock target tables Lock the tables in the target database and or schema during the data transfer proc
303. ring a HI TP connection 1 Select the HTTP tab and enable Use HTTP Tunnel 2 Enter URL of the tunneling script e g htto Wwww navicat com ntunnel_mysqal php 3 If your server installed a Web Application Firewall you can check the Encode outgoing query with base64 option 4 Ifthe tunneling script is hosted in a password protected server or you have to access internet over a proxy server you can provide the required authentication details in Authentication or Proxy tab 5 Navicat host name at the General settings page should be set relatively to the HTTP server which provided by your database hosting company Note HTTP Tunnel and SSH Tunnel cannot function simultaneously The SSH Tunnel is disabled when you select the HTTP Tunnel and vice versa 33 server Objects Navicat provides powerful tools to manage server objects such as databases tables views functions etc Note Before working with the server objects in Navicat you should establish the connection first MySQL MariaDB Objects To start working with the server objects you should create and open a connection If the server is empty you need to right click the connection in the Connection pane and choose New Database to create a new database To edit an existing database properties right click the database in the Connection pane and choose Edit Database Please notice that MySQL does not support renaming database through its interface at this moment Access t
304. rivileges can be granted Privileges To edit specific object privileges for role click s Add Privilege to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object Check the object to show the grid on the right panel 3 Inthe grid check Grant option against the privilege listed in Privilege to assign this role to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted 274 PostgreSQL Security PostgreSQL manages database access permissions using users and groups Users own database objects for example tables and can assign privileges on those objects to other users to control who has access to which objects Note Starting from PostgreSQL version 8 1 users and groups were no longer distinct kinds of entities now there are only roles Any role can act as a user a group or both The concept of roles subsumes the concepts of users and groups Only a superuser a user who is allowed all rights can add delete users PostgreSQL installs a single superuser by default named posigres All other users must be added by this user or by another subsequently added superuser When you create a database object you become its owner By default only the owner of an object can do anything with the object In order to allow other users to use it privileges must be granted However users that have the superuser attribute can always access any object Ordinarily only the objec
305. routine does not contain statements that read or write data It is the default if none of these characteristics is given explicitly No SQL Indicate that the routine contains no SQL statements Reads SQL Data Indicate that the routine contains statements that read data but not statements that write data Modifies SQL Data Indicate that the routine contains statements that may write data Deterministic A procedure or function is considered deterministic if it always produces the same result for the same input parameters and not deterministic otherwise Result To run the procedure function click Run on the toolbar If the SQL statement is correct the statement will be executed and if the statement is supposed to return data the Result tab opens with the data returned by the 45 procedure function If an error occurs while executing the procedure function execution stops the appropriate error message is displayed If the function procedure requires input parameter the Input Parameters box will pop up Use to separate the parameters Hint Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets MySQL MariaDB Events MySQL Event Scheduler was added in MySQL 5 1 6 MySQL Events are tasks that run according to a schedule Therefore we sometimes refer to them as scheduled events When you create an event you are creating a named database object containing one or more SQL statements to be executed at one or more regular intervals
306. rprise e The ability to address diverse data sources similarly Note SQL Azure does not support General Properties You can choose the Server Type SQL Server or Other Data Source If you choose Other Data Source define the required information Provider Choose the unique programmatic identifier PROGID of the OLE DB provider corresponding to the data source Product Name Define the product name of the OLE DB data source to add as a linked server 171 Data Source Define the name of the data source as interpreted by the OLE DB provider Provider String Define the OLE DB provider specific connection string that identifies a unique data source Location Define the location of the database as interpreted by the OLE DB provider Catalog Define the catalog to be used when making a connection to the OLE DB provider Security In this tab add or delete a mapping between logins on the local instance of SQL Server and remote logins on the linked server Local Login Choose a login on the local server Impersonate Check this option to specify that logins use their own credentials to connect to the linked server Remote Login Enter the username used to connect the linked server Remote Password Enter the user password Set the action when a login not defined in the list e Not be made e Be made without using a security context e Be made using the login s current security context e Be made usi
307. rting a new page when it begins and finishing the last page when it ends The PrinterSetup property is used to determine the page size and printer settings ShiftRelativeTo Use to specify the vertical positioning that should take place between multiple stretching components in a band Stretch Determine whether the image is scaled to fit inside the component StretchWithParent Allow a shape or line to expand or contract based on the change in height of the band or region in which it is contained SuppressRepeatedValues When the value of a field as determined by the DataField property is the same across several records the SuppressRepeatedValues property allows you to print the value only once each time the field value changes TraverseAllData Indicate that the subreport will continue to print print on additional pages in the same exact position until all data is traversed By default the fixed type subreport truncates the data 268 Report Preview The Preview tab contains the rendered report You can to control and view report output An outline of page nodes is displayed on the left side of the form adjacent to the page viewer Use the Print button to send report output to the printer or to an output file such as PDF To create a Search Report enable the AutoSearch option in the Query Designer Tables Fields Calcs Search Group Group Search Sort SOL Available Fields Then you can click
308. s Navicat Version 11 User Guide ea PremiumSoft CyberTech Ltd Table of Contents Getting Started System Requirements Registration Installation Maintenance Upgrade End User License Agreement Connection Navicat Cloud General Settings Advanced Settings SSL Settings SSH Settings HTTP Settings Server Objects MySQL MariaDB Objects MySQL MariaDB Tables MySQL MariaDB Table Fields MySQL MariaDB Table Indexes MySQL MariaDB Table Foreign Keys MySQL MariaDB Table Triggers MySQL MariaDB Table Options MySQL MariaDB Views MySQL MariaDB Functions Procedures MySQL MariaDB Events Oracle Objects Oracle Data Pump Available only in Full Version Oracle Data Pump Export Oracle Data Pump Import Oracle Debugger Available only in Full Version Oracle Physical Attributes Default Storage Characteristics Oracle Tables Oracle Normal Tables Oracle Table Fields Oracle Table Indexes Oracle Table Foreign Keys Oracle Table Uniques Oracle Table Checks Oracle Table Triggers Oracle Table Options Oracle External Tables Fields for Oracle External Tables 66 External Properties for Oracle External Tables 67 Access Parameters for Oracle External Tables 67 Oracle Index Organized Tables 68 Options for Oracle Index Organized Tables 68 Oracle Views 69 Oracle Functions Procedures 70 Oracle Database Links 71 Oracle Indexes 72 Oracle Java 74 Oracle Materialized Views 75 Oracle Materialized View Logs 78 Oracle Packages 7
309. s Window Help Al as E OF aa Connection User Table 4 Navicat Cloud 4 Office Main Office gt EJ UK Office 4 Project MH 0015 4 Development Servers Development 03 D Development 01 4 Production Servers D Production Server 02 4 Project DT 0052 adamsmith07 gt I TeamA s 9 TeamB a EJ Testing Server 02 hr 4 sakila gt Oo Views gt fi Functions b E Events gt BFR Queries D Reports b 23 Backups 4 Production Server 4 es HR gt FEA Tables gt oo Views Ks gt 16 Tables 16 in current group Create a new account 00O View a a le Report Backup Schedule T m EEH Query 5 HK Function Event Objects ee Company Model i Untitled sakila Testing Serve Design Table r New Table Delete Table Ee Import Wizard Auto Increment Value Modified Date FA actor 401 Fl address 606 E category 17 Ef city 601 E country customer Ef film film_actor film_category Ef film text inventory Ey language payment rental FA staff store Open Table Name 600 lt Project DT 0052 EN Testing Server 02 User root Database sakila 1 Choose File gt Navicat Cloud from the main menu a 2 JY Click Create Navicat ID Enter the required information and click Sign Up button A verification email will send to your email address Click the link in the email to verify the new account Model gt Data Length 16 KB 80 KB 16 KB 48 KB 16 KB 80
310. s can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT or it can be a compound statement written using BEGIN and END Compound statements can contain declarations loops and other control structure statements Parameter Define trigger function parameter Return type schema and Return Type The return type of the trigger function Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Advanced Properties Owner The owner of the trigger function Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later Language The name of the language that the function is implemented in May be C internal or the name of a user defined procedural language For backward compatibility the name may be enclosed by single quotes Volatility These attributes inform the query optimizer about the behavior of the function At most one choice may be specified If none of these appear VOLATILE is the default assumption IMMUTABLE The function cannot modify the database and always returns the same result when given the same argument values that is it does not do database lookups or otherwise use information not directly present in its argument list If this option is given any call of the function with all constant arguments can be immediately replaced with the function value STABLE The function cannot modify the database and that within a single table scan it will consistently return the same result
311. s for Oracle External Tables Default Directory Specify the default directory for the external table Directory Set the external directory Location Set the external source location Access Driver Specify the access driver for the external table The default type for external tables is ORACLE LOADER Reject Limit Specify the limit on the number of errors that can occur during a query of the external data Parallel With Degree Check to enable parallel query on the data sources and specify the degree of parallel access Access Parameters for Oracle External Tables Describe the mapping of the external data to the Oracle Database data columns 67 Using CLOB Check this option to get a CLOB data value of the returned query Oracle Index Organized Tables An index organized table has a storage organization that is a variant of a primary B tree Data for an index organized table is stored in a B tree index structure in a primary key sorted manner Each leaf block in the index structure stores both the key and nonkey columns Index organized tables have full table functionality They support features such as constraints triggers etc with additional features such as key compression Note The Table Designer for Index Organized Tables differs from Normal Tables only on the Options tab Therefore you can refer to the Normal Table on the similar tabs Options for Oracle Index Organized Tables Tablespace Define
312. se lower upper or mixed case and the result is displayed accordingly oa Oo The time using the 12 hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier followed by a for any hour before noon or p for any hour after noon The a p specifier can use lower upper or mixed case and the result is displayed accordingly ampm The time using the 12 hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier followed by the contents of the TimeAMString global variable for any hour before noon or the contents of the TimePMString global variable for any hour after noon The date separator character given by the DateSeparator global variable The time separator character given by the TimeSeparator global variable KX XX Characters enclosed in single or double quotes are displayed as is with no formatting changes Format specifiers may be written in uppercase or lowercase letters both produce the same result 300 Model Options Available only in Full Version Highlight Objects With this option is on when a mouse cursor hovers over an object Navicat will highlight its border with blue color Hint Restart Navicat to take effect Highlight With Relation With this option is on when a mouse cursor hovers over a table or a view Navicat will highlight it s foreign keys or view relations with blue or green color indicating relationships with other objects Hint Restart Navicat to take effect Guess Field Type With this option is on Navi
313. selected in the Report Designer The Edit toolbar displays the different shape types Rectangle Square Rounded Rectangle Rounded Square Ellipse Circle Line component selected This configuration allows you to move the line to the top bottom left or right within the line s selection handles Diagonal Left Diagonal Right Standard Toolbar This toolbar will assist with saving the report layout accessing the print and print preview options and accessing the cut and paste operations New Create a blank report layout Open Display the Open dialog allowing you to open an existing report layout H Save Save a report layout to file Print Display the Print dialog before sending the report to the printer S Print Preview Display the Print Preview window ob Cut Cut the currently selected components into the clipboard 262 Ei Copy Copy the currently selected components into the clipboard I Paste Paste the components in the clipboard into the report Format Toolbar This toolbar will assist with setting the font and colors It will also assist with layering the components Font Name Select the font name for textual components Font Size Select the font size You can also type in this box to set the font size exactly E Bold Set the font to bold J Italic Set font to italic U Underline Set font to underline Left Justify Left justify the text in the component
314. sign process For example to explain a grouping table objects To create a new label click the T button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas The pop up menu options of the label object in canvas include Edit Change the content of the label Cut Remove the label from the diagram and put it on the clipboard Copy Copy the label from the diagram to the clipboard Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram 215 Select All select all the labels in the diagram Delete Delete a label from the diagram Size to Fit Resize the label automatically to fit its contents Bring to Front Bring the label to the foreground Send to Back Move the label to the background Create Notes Notes are typically used to help document the diagram design process For example to explain a grouping table objects To create a new note click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas The pop up menu options of the note object in canvas include Edit Change the content of the note Cut Remove the note from the diagram and put it on the clipboard Copy Copy the note from the diagram to the clipboard Paste Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram Select All Notes Select all the notes in the diagram Delete Delete a note from the diagram Color Change the color of the note Size to Fit Resize the note automatica
315. state value an initial value for the state and a state transition function The state transition function is just an ordinary function that could also be used outside the context of the aggregate A final function can also be specified in case the desired result of the aggregate is different from the data that needs to be kept in the running state value Click as gt Aggregate to open an object list for Aggregate Properties Owner The owner of the aggregate function Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later 112 Input type An input data type on which this aggregate function operates Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later For versions below 8 2 just select the Input type schema and Input type from the drop down lists State Type Schema and State type The data type for the aggregate s state value State Function Schema and State function The state transition function to be called for each input row For an N argument aggregate function the state function must take N 1 arguments the first being of type state_data_type and the rest matching the declared input data type s of the aggregate The function must return a value of type state_data_type This function takes the current state value and the current input data value s and returns the next state value Final Function Schema and Final function The final function called to compute the aggregate s result after all input rows have been traversed The function m
316. strictly prohibited from installing or using the Trial Demo Version or Non commercial Lite Version of the Software for any commercial training purpose h You may only use the Not for Resale Version of the Software to review and evaluate the Software i You may receive the Software in more than one medium but you shall only install or use one medium Regardless of the number of media you receive you may use only the medium that is appropriate for the server or computer on which the Software is to be installed j You may receive the Software in more than one platform but you shall only install or use one platform k You shall not use the Software to develop any application having the same primary function as the Software Inthe event that you fail to comply with this EULA PremiumSoft may terminate the license and you must destroy all copies of the Software with all other rights of both parties and all other provisions of this EULA surviving any such termination m This program may include Oracle Instant Client OCI You agree that you shall 1 2 not use of the Oracle Instant Client to the business operations not assign give or transfer the Oracle Instant Client or an interest in them to another individual or entity a make the Programs available in any manner to any third party for use in the third party s business operations and b title to the Programs from passing to the end user or any other party not re
317. t Specify the email subject with customized format Body Write email content 249 Host SMTP Server Enter your Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP server for outgoing messages Port Enter the port number you connect to your outgoing e mail SMTP server Default value is 25 Use Authentication Check this option and enter User Name and Password if your SMTP server requires authorization to send email Secure Connection Specify the connection to use TLS SSL secure connection or Never Send test mail Navicat will send you a test mail indicating success or failure Batch Job Converter Available only in Navicat Premium Navicat Premium allows you to convert saved batch jobs from either Navicat for MySQL Navicat for Oracle Navicat for PostgreSQL Navicat for SQLite Navicat for SQL Server and Navicat for MariaDB to it Right click in the Object List pane and select Batch Job Converter from the pop up menu In Vista or above you can select all batch jobs from all or either one Navicat from Select All button Delete original batch jobs Check this option if you want to delete the original batch jobs in Navicat If the original batch job is deleted the scheduled batch job will not work until it is set again in Navicat Premium or the original application Overwrite existing batch jobs Check this option if you want to overwrite the existing batch jobs in Navicat Premium Append when batch job exists Check this
318. t behavior FAIL When a constraint violation occurs the command aborts with a return code SQLITE CONSTRAINT But any changes to the database that the command made prior to encountering the constraint violation are preserved and are not backed out For example if an UPDATE statement encountered a constraint violation on the 100th row that it attempts to update then the first 99 row changes are preserved but changes to rows 100 and beyond never occur IGNORE When a constraint violation occurs the one row that contains the constraint violation is not inserted or changed But the command continues executing normally Other rows before and after the row that contained the constraint violation continue to be inserted or updated normally No error is returned when the IGNORE conflict resolution algorithm is used REPLACE When a UNIQUE constraint violation occurs the pre existing rows that are causing the constraint violation are removed prior to inserting or updating the current row Thus the insert or update always occurs The command continues executing normally following REPLACE No error is returned by the REPLACE conflict resolution If a NOT NULL constraint violation occurs the NULL value is replaced by the default value for that column If the column has no default value then the ABORT algorithm is used If a CHECK constraint violation occurs then the IGNORE algorithm is used Auto Increment Set Reset the Auto Increment value in
319. t subject the server rejects the connection Cipher This is needed to ensure that ciphers and key lengths of sufficient strength are used SSL itself can be weak if old algorithms using short encryption keys are used Using this option you can ask that a specific cipher method is used to allow a connection Server Privileges In the grid check Granted option against the server privilege listed in Privilege to assign this user to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted 271 Privileges To edit specific object privileges for user click Add Privilege to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object 2 Check the object to show the grid on the right panel 3 Inthe grid check State option against the privilege listed in Privilege to assign this user to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted Oracle Security Oracle manages database access permissions using users and roles Users own schema objects for example tables views and can assign privileges on those objects to other users to control who has access to which objects In addition to the user accounts that you create the database includes a number of user accounts that are automatically created upon installation Administrative accounts SYS SYSTEM SYSMAN and DBSNMP Administrative accounts are highly privileged accounts to perform administrative tasks such as
320. t NEW and OLD and may not contain aggregate functions Definition The command or commands that make up the rule action Valid commands are SELECT INSERT UPDATE DELETE or NOTIFY Within condition and command the special table names NEW and OLD may be used to refer to values in the referenced table NEW is valid in ON INSERT and ON UPDATE rules to refer to the new row being inserted or updated OLD is valid in ON UPDATE and ON DELETE rules to refer to the existing row being updated or deleted 101 Comment Define the comment for the rule PostgreSQL Table Triggers A trigger is a specification that the database should automatically execute a particular function whenever a certain type of operation is performed Triggers can be defined to execute either before or after any INSERT UPDATE or DELETE operation either once per modified row or once per SQL statement In the Triggers tab just simply click a trigger field for editing By using the trigger toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected trigger field Note To create a trigger on a table the user must have the TRIGGER privilege on the table Button Description F Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table Te Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name This must be distinct from the name of any other trigger for the same table Row trigger This specifies whether the trigger procedure should be fire
321. t employs tree structure which allows you to take action upon the database and their objects through their pop up menus quickly and easily After login Navicat Cloud feature the Connection pane will divide into Navicat Cloud and My Connections sections To show the opened objects only choose View gt Show Only Active Objects from the main menu To view or hide the Connection pane choose View gt Show Connection from the main menu Tab Bar Tab Bar allows you to switch among Object List and the tabbed windows You can also choose to always display pop ups on a new tab or to always display them in a new window If you have multiple tabs open you can use CTRL TAB to easily switch to other tabs See also Options Object List Toolbar Object List Toolbar provides other controls that you can use to manipulate the objects 5 Object List Object List pane displays a list of objects such as tables views queries and so on 6 Object Information Object Information pane shows the detailed information of the server objects and Navicat objects To view or hide the Object Information pane choose View gt Show Object Information from the main menu T Navicat Cloud Activity Navicat Cloud Activity pane shows the project members and activities You select a project in the Connection pane or a Navicat Cloud object in the Object List pane To view or hide the Navicat Cloud Activity pane choose View gt Show Navicat Cloud Activity from th
322. t maps the rows of a table or index into partitions based on the values of a specified column Click aS gt Partition Function to open an object list for Partition Function Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later General Properties Input Parameter Type Choose the data type of the column used for partitioning Length Specify the length of the data type if necessary Decimals Specify the decimals of the data type if necessary 176 Collation Specify the collation of the data type if necessary Boundary values belong to right interval Specify to the right of each boundary value interval Boundary Values Specify the boundary values for each partition of a partitioned table or index that uses partition_function_name SQL Server Partition Schemes A partition scheme is a scheme in the current database that maps the partitions of a partitioned table or index to filegroups The number and domain of the partitions of a partitioned table or index are determined in a partition scheme Click aS gt Partition Scheme to open an object list for Partition Scheme Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later General Properties Partition Function Choose the partition function Filegroup Mapping Specify the filegroups to hold the partitions specified by partition_function_name SQL Preview The SQL Preview tab shows the CREATE statement and necessary SQL statements of the database or schema object For some dat
323. t name 94 Tablespace The tablespace of the primary key constraint s index Fill Factor The fillfactor storage parameter of the primary key constraint s index Deferrable The primary key constraint can be deferred Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 0 or later Deferred The primary key constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 0 or later Field s Properties Note The following options depend on the field type you are chosen Default Set the default value for the field Comment Set any optional text describing the current field Collation Set the collation of the column which must be of a collatable data type If not specified the column data type s default collation is used Note Support from PostgreSQL 9 1 or later Dimensions set the dimensions of array specifiers Object Schema Set the object schema for the field Object Type Set the object type for the field 95 PostgreSQL Table Indexes Indexes are primarily used to enhance database performance though inappropriate use can result in slower performance An index field can be an expression computed from the values of one or more columns of the table row This feature can be used to obtain fast access to data based on some transformation of the basic data In the Indexes tab just simply click an index field for editing By using the index toolbar you can create new edit and
324. t s owner or a Superuser can grant or revoke privileges on an object However it is possible to grant a privilege With Grant Option which gives the recipient the right to grant it in turn to others If the grant option is subsequently revoked then all who received the privilege from that recipient directly or through a chain of grants will lose the privilege Note The special name public can be used to grant a privilege to every role user group on the system PostgreSQL Server 7 3 to 8 0 PostgreSQL version 7 3 to 8 0 manages database access permissions using Users and Groups PostgreSQL User Designer General Properties User name Set name for user User ID Specify an ID for the user This is normally not necessary but may be useful if you need to recreate the owner of an orphaned object If this is not specified the highest assigned user ID plus one with a minimum of 100 will be used as default Password Set Password and re type it in the Confirm Password text box Note If you do not plan to use password authentication you can omit this option but then the user will not be able to connect if you decide to switch to password authentication 275 Password Encryption This option control whether the password is stored ENCRYPTED or UNENCRYPTED in the system catalogs If neither is specified the default behavior is determined by the configuration parameter password_encryption Expiry Date Set a date and time af
325. t statements in each execution which will make the data transfer process faster Use hexadecimal format for BLOB Insert BLOB data as hexadecimal format Continue on error Ignore errors that are encountered during the transfer process Lock source tables Lock the tables in the source database and or schema so that any update on the table is not allowed once the data transfer is triggered off Drop target objects before create Check this option if database objects already exist in the target database and or schema the existing objects will be deleted once the data transfer starts Create target database schema if not exist Create a new database schema if the database schema specified in target server does not exist Data Synchronization Available only in Full Version Navicat allows you to transfer data from one database and or schema to another with detailed analytical process In other words Navicat provides the ability for data in different databases and or schemas to be kept up to date so that each repository contains the same information You are not only authorized to rollback the transferring process but also insert delete and update records to the destination You can save your settings as a profile for setting schedule Select Tools gt Sa Data Synchronization from the main menu All tables must contain primary keys and all table structures must be identical between the source and target You could apply Stru
326. t the connection string is as follows scheme user_name password host_name port_num db_name tbl_name Sample of connection strings CONNECTION mysal username password hostname port database tablename 41 CONNECTION mysal username hostname database tablename CONNECTION mysal username password hostname database tablename Tablespace only for ndbcluster table To specify the tablespace for the storage Note Support from MySQL 5 1 6 or later Storage only for ndbcluster table To specify type of storage used disk or memory and can be one of DISK MEMORY or DEFAULT Note Support from MySQL 5 1 6 or later Stats Auto Recalc Indicate whether to automatically recalculate persistent statistics for an InnoDB table Note Support from MariaDB 10 0 or later Stats Persistent Indicate whether the InnoDB statistics created by ANALYZE TABLE will remain on disk or not Note Support from MariaDB 10 0 or later Partition Set the Partition options Note Support from MySQL 5 1 or later Partition By Select the function that is used to determine the partition HASH KEY LINEAR HASH LINEAR KEY RANGE and LIST Partitions Set the partition number Subpartition By Select the function that is used to determine the subpartition Hash and Key Subpartitions Set the subpartition number Partition Use or Partition to add or delete the partition Use or Subpartition to add or Definition delete the su
327. tabase to members of the db_owner dbocreator or sysadmin roles WITH KEEP_REPLICATION KEEP REPLICATION should used when setting up replication to work with log shipping RECOVERY Roll back all uncommitted transactions After the recovery process the database is ready for use NORECOVERY Do not roll back the uncommitted transactions STANDBY Specify a Standby file that allows the recovery effects to be undone SQL Server Schemas A schema contains named objects tables views functions etc whose names may duplicate those of other objects existing in other schemas The schema name must be distinct from any existing schema name in the current database Note SQL Server 2000 or below does not support edit create and delete schema SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab General Properties 151 Schema Name The name of a schema which is identified within the database Owner The name of the database level principal that will own the schema This principal may own other schemas and may not use the current schema as its default schema SQL Server Tables Tables are database objects that contain all the data in a database A table definition is a collection of columns In tables data is organized in a row and column format similar to a soreadsheet Each row represents a unique record and each column represents a field within the record Click E to open an object list for Table When open a table with graphi
328. table if you have deleted a large part of a table or if you have made many changes to a table with variable length rows tables that have VARCHAR BLOB or TEXT columns Deleted records are maintained in a linked list and subsequent INSERT operations reuse old row positions Currently MySQL supports optimizing only for MyISAM InnoDB and BDB tables Repair Tables Repair a possibly corrupted table and returns a result set Repair Table tries to repair only the index tree Extended MySQL creates the index row by row instead of creating one index at a time with sorting Get Rows Count Count the number of rows in the table Maintain Oracle Maintain Table Enable Table Lock Choose Enable Table Lock to enable table locks thereby allowing DDL operations on the table All currently executing transactions must commit or roll back before Oracle Database enables the table lock Disable Table Lock Choose Disable Table Lock to disable table locks thereby preventing DDL operations on the table 178 Enable Row Movement Choose Enable Row Movement to allow the database to move a row thus changing the rowid Disable Row Movement Choose Disable Row Movement if you want to prevent the database from moving a row thus preventing a change of rowid Shrink Space Shrink Space is to compact the table segment This clause is valid only for segments in tablespaces with automatic segment management By default Oracle database compacts
329. te either before or after any INSERT UPDATE or DELETE operation either once per modified row or once per SQL statement In the Triggers tab just simply click a trigger field for editing By using the trigger toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected trigger field 63 Button Description o Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table Fe Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger Name Set the trigger name Compound Check to set the trigger as a compound trigger Note Support from Oracte 11g or later Row trigger Check to set the trigger as a row trigger Fires Specify the trigger timing whether the trigger action is to be run before or after the triggering statement Insert Fire the trigger whenever an INSERT statement adds a row to a table or adds an element to a nested table Update Fire the trigger whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in one of the columns specified in Update Of Fields lf no Update Of Fields are present the trigger will be fired whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in any column of the table or nested table Delete Fire the trigger whenever a DELETE statement removes a row from the table or removes an element from a nested table Update Of Fields Specify the fields for UPDATE statement trigger upon necessary Enable You can choose whether to enable disable the trigger constraint by checking unchecking the box Definition Type in the
330. ted code in the Code Window or the variable in the Smart Data view and choose Add to watch list You can adjust the value of a watch variable by right click the variable and choose Adjust Value To delete a watch variable or all watch variables right click a variable and choose Remove Variable or Remove All Variable Oracle Physical Attributes Default Storage Characteristics Free Specify a whole number representing the percentage of space in each data block of the database object reserved for future updates to rows of the object Used Specify a whole number representing the minimum percentage of used space that Oracle maintains for each data block of the database object A block becomes a candidate for row insertion when its used space falls below this value Initial Transactions Specify the initial number of concurrent transaction entries allocated within each data block allocated to the database object Maximum Transactions Specify the maximum number of concurrent update transactions allowed for each data block in the segment Initial Specify the size of the first extent of the object Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes Next Specify the size of the next extent to be allocated to the object Use the drop down list K M G T P or E to specify the size in kilobytes megabytes gigabytes terabytes petabytes or exabytes
331. ted unique Use the Name edit box to set the unique name To set field s as unique just simply double click the Fields field or click to open the editor s for editing Enable You can choose whether to enable disable the unique constraint by checking unchecking the box Oracle Table Checks A check constraint is the most generic constraint type It allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must satisfy a Boolean truth value expression In the Checks tab just simply click a check field for editing By using the check toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected check field Button Description OoOo Add Check Add a check to the table Delete Check Delete the selected check Use the Name edit box to set the check name Check Set the condition for checking e g field_name1 gt 0 AND field_name2 gt field_name1 in the Check edit box A check constraint specified as a column constraint should reference that column s value only while an expression appearing in a table constraint may reference multiple columns Definition Type in the definition for the check constraint Enable You can choose whether to enable disable the check constraint by checking unchecking the box Oracle Table Triggers A trigger is a specification that the database should automatically execute a particular function whenever a certain type of operation is performed Triggers can be defined to execu
332. ter criteria that you specify for the table grid Moreover it allows you to save filter criteria as a profile for future use Click f Filter from the toolbar to activate the editor 197 File Edit View Window Help p Begin Transaction Memo JE store id is equal to 1 and active is equal to 1 or last_ name contains MA lt Add gt lt Move Up gt Move Down gt lt Apply Ctrl R gt j store_id first_name MARY PATRICIA LINDA ELIZABETH MARIA DOROTHY NANCY HELEN DONNA RUTH MICHELLE LAURA DEBORAH customer_id k i i ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee i l C 8 Sl E Import E gt Export last_name SMITH JOHNSON WILLIAMS BROWN MILLER TAYLOR THOMAS HARRIS THOMPSON MARTINEZ CLARK RODRIGUEZ WALKER SELECT FROM customer WHERE store id T AND Cactive 1 OR last_narne 1 To add a new condition to the criteria just simply click lt Add gt email MARY SMITH sakilacustomer org PATRICIAJOHNSON sakilacustomer org LINDA WILLIAMS sakilacustomer org ELIZABETH BROWN sakilacustomer org MARIA MILLER sakilacustomer org DOROTHY TAYLOR sakilacustomer org NANCY THOMAS sakilacustomer org HELEN HARRIS sakilacustomer org DONNA THOMPSON sakilacustomer org RUTH MARTINE sakilacustorner org MICHELLE CLARK sakilacustomer org LAURA RODRIGUEZ sakilacustomer org DEBORAH WALKER sakilacustomer org WH Record 1 of 318 in page 1 2 Click on the column box ne
333. ter variables such as the current time zone etc Also note that the current_timestamp family of functions qualify as stable since their values do not change within a transaction VOLATILE The function value can change even within a single table scan so no optimizations can be made Relatively few database functions are volatile in this sense some examples are random currval timeofday But note that any function that has side effects must be classified volatile even if its result is quite predictable to prevent calls from being optimized away an example is setval Security of definer Specify that the function is to be executed with the privileges of the user that created it Returns Set Indicate that the function will return a set of items rather than a single item Strict Indicate that the function always returns null whenever any of its arguments are null If this parameter is specified the function is not executed when there are null arguments instead a null result is assumed automatically Estimated cost A positive number giving the estimated execution cost for the function in units of cou_operator_cost If the function returns a set this is the cost per returned row If the cost is not specified 1 unit is assumed for C language and internal 111 functions and 100 units for functions in all other languages Larger values cause the planner to try to avoid evaluating the function more often than necess
334. ter which the user s password is no longer valid If this clause is omitted the password will be valid for all time Superuser Check this option to define the user as a Superuser Can create database Check this option to define the user to be allowed to create databases Member of In the grid check Granted option against the group listed in Group Name to assign this user to be a member of selected group Multiple groups can be granted Privileges To edit specific object privileges for user click Add Privilege to open the window and follow the steps below 1 Expand the node in the tree view until reaching to the target object 2 Check the object to show the grid on the right panel In the grid check Granted or Grant Option option against the privilege listed in Privilege to assign this user to have that privilege Multiple privileges can be granted PostgreSQL Group Designer General Properties Group name Set name for group Group ID Specify an ID for the group This is normally not necessary but may be useful if you need to recreate a group referenced in the permissions of some object If this is not specified the highest assigned group ID plus one witha minimum of 100 will be used as default Members In the grid check Granted option against the user listed in Member to assign selected user to be a member of this group Multiple users can be granted 2 6 Privileges To edit specific object privileges
335. the basis of the agreement between PremiumSoft and you PremiumSoft would not be able to provide the Software on an economic basis without such limitations Such Limited Warranty and Disclaimer and Limited Liability inure to the benefit of PremiumSoft s licensors 11 Term By downloading and or installing this SOFTWARE the Licensor agrees to the terms of this EULA This license is effective until terminated Licensor has the right to terminate your License immediately if you fail to comply with any term of this License as is Licensor makes no warranties express or implied arising from course of dealing or usage of trade or statutory as to any matter whatsoever In particular any and all warranties or merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non infringement of third party rights are expressly excluded 12 Governing Law This License will be governed by the laws in force in Hong Kong You hereby consent to the non exclusive jurisdiction and venue sitting in Hong Kong to resolve any disputes arising under this EULA Should you have any questions concerning the validity of this License please contact licensing navicat com If you desire to contact the Licensor for any other reason please contact support navicat com PremiumSoft and other trademarks contained in the Software are trademarks or registered trademarks of PremiumSoft CyberTech Ltd in the United States and or other countries Third party trademarks t
336. the edit field The auto increment value indicates the value for next record WITHOUT ROWID Omit the rowid and oid and _rowid_ Note Support from SQLite 3 8 2 or later SQLite Views Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of tables as if it were a single table and limiting their access to just that Views can also be used to restrict access to rows a subset of a particular table Click p i to open an object list for View 139 You can create a view shortcut by right click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without activating the main Navicat Button Description S O LELE i Preview the result of the view G Explain Show the Query Plan of the view Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or In a New Tab View Builder Available only in Full Version View Builder allows you to build views visually It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL See Query Builder for details Definition You can edit the view definition as SQL statement SELECT statement it implements Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advance
337. the module execute in the context of the user Encrypted Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement Definition This tab will appear when the Definition Type is set to SQL Statement in General tab Enter valid SQL statements SQL Server Assemblies An assembly is a managed application module that contains class metadata and managed code as an object in an instance of SQL Server By referencing this module common language runtime CLR functions stored procedures 174 triggers user defined aggregates and user defined types can be created in the database Click as gt Assembly to open an object list for Assembly Note Support from SQL Server 2005 or later General Properties Owner Specify the name of a user or role as owner of the assembly Permission set Specify a set of code access permissions that are granted to the assembly when it is accessed by SQL Server If not specified SAFE is applied as the default Assembly Specify the local path or network location where the assembly that is being uploaded is located and also the manifest file name that corresponds to the assembly Dependent Assemblies Upload a file to be associated with the assembly such as source code debug files or other related information into the server and made visible in the sys assembly_ files catalog view SQL Server Database Triggers A database trigger is a DDL trigger to the current database DDL triggers execute in response t
338. the segment adjusts the high water mark and releases the recuperated space immediately Compacting the segment requires row movement Therefore you must enable row movement for the table you want to shrink before shrink space Further if your application has any rowid based triggers you should disable them before issuing this clause Move Move relocates data of a nonpartitioned table or of a partition of a partitioned table into a new segment optionally ina different tablespace and optionally modify any of its storage attributes Collect Statistics Collect Statistics analyzes the contents of tables When you analyze a table the database collects statistics about expressions occurring in any function based indexes as well Therefore be sure to create function based indexes on the table before analyzing the table Validate Structure Validate Structure verifies the integrity of the structure of a table The statistics collected by this clause are not used by the Oracle database optimizer If the structure is valid no error is returned However if the structure is corrupt an error message will be shown For a table Oracle database verifies the integrity of each of the data blocks and rows Maintain View Compile To recompile the view specification or body Maintain Function Procedure Compile To recompile the function procedure specification or body Compile for Debug To recompile the function procedure specific
339. thentication you can omit this option but then the role will not be able to connect if you decide to switch to password authentication Password Encryption This option control whether the password is stored ENCRYPTED or UNENCRYPTED in the system catalogs If neither is specified the default behavior is determined by the configuration parameter password_encryption Connection Limit If role can log in this specifies how many concurrent connections the role can make 1 the default means no limit 277 Expiry Date Set a date and time after which the role s password is no longer valid If this clause is omitted the password will be valid for all time Superuser Check this option to determine the new role is a superuser who can override all access restrictions within the database Can create database Check this option to define a role s ability to create databases Can create role Check this option to allow creating roles Inherit privileges Check this option to determine whether a role inherits the privileges of roles it is a member of Can update system catalog Check this option to allow a role s ability to update system catalog Member of In the grid check Granted or Admin Option option against the role listed in Role Name to assign this role to be a member of selected role Multiple roles can be granted Member In the grid check Granted or Admin Option option against the role listed in Member to assign th
340. ther a virtual table or a stored query Unless a view is indexed its data is not stored in the database as a distinct object What is stored in the database is a SELECT statement The result set of the SELECT statement forms the virtual table returned by the view A user can use this virtual table by referencing the view name in Transact SQL statements the same way a table is referenced Click ae to open an object list for View You can create a view shortcut by right click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut from the pop up menu This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without activating the main Navicat Note SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab Button Description Preview the result of the view 160 G Explain Show the Query Plan of the view Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor Note You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View gt Show Result gt Below Query Editor or In a New Tab View Builder Available only in Full Version View Builder allows you to build views visually It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL See Query Builder for details Definition You can edit the view definition as SQL statement SELECT statement it implements Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing s
341. tificate CA Certificate The path of the trusted certificate authorities Certificate Revocation List The file path of the SSL certificate revocation list CRL SSH Settings Secure SHell SSH is a program to log in into another computer over a network execute commands on a remote server and move files from one machine to another It provides strong authentication and secure encrypted communications between two hosts known as SSH Port Forwarding Tunneling over an insecure network Typically it is employed as an encrypted version of Telnet In a Telnet session all communications including username and password are transmitted in plain text allowing anyone to listen in on your session and steal passwords and other information Such sessions are also susceptible to session hijacking where a malicious user takes over your session once you have authenticated SSH serves to prevent such vulnerabilities and allows you to access a remote server s shell without compromising security Note Available only for MySQL Oracle PostgreSQL SQL Server and MariaDB 31 Please make sure that the parameter Allowl coForwarding in the Linux server must be set to value yes otherwise the SSH port forwarding will be disabled To look for the path etc ssh sshd_config By default the SSH port forwarding should be enabled Please double check the value settings Even the server support SSH tunnel however if the port forwarding be
342. tion to be performed when data is loaded into a preexisting table SKIP The preexisting table is left unchanged APPEND New rows are added to the existing rows in the table TRUNCATE Rows are removed from a preexisting table before inserting rows from the Import REPLACE Preexisting tables are replaced with new definitions Before creating the new table the old table is dropped Import Data Select the objects to import If you select TABLE mode specify the schema in the Schema text box Dump Files Add dump files to the dump file set for the import Network Database Link The name of a database link to the remote database that will be the source of data and metadata for the current job 52 Estimate Specify that the estimate method for the size of the tables should be performed before starting the job Flashback SCN System change number SCN to serve as transactionally consistent point for reading user data Flashback Time Either the date and time used to determine a consistent point for reading user data or a string of the form TO_TIMESTAMP Transportable Operate on metadata for tables and their dependent objects within a set of selected tablespaces to perform a transportable tablespace export DataFile Path Specify the full file specification for a datafile in the transportable tablespace set Filter Include Exclude Include or Exclude a set of objects from the Import operation Choose the Obje
343. tions used by the report previewer When enabled the previewer can be used to find and highlight text that appears in the pages of the report _ nabled C Show All _ Case Sensitive _ Whole Word StartingPage Start Search on First Page Start Search on Current Page C Show the Find Text Toolbar Default Find Text String o cme 266 Report Layout There are many special options to set the layout You can simply right click the components and enable the following options AutoDisplay Determine whether to automatically display the contents of a BLOB in a database field in a Memo or Image component AutoSize The report component resizes the width and length AutoSizeFont Set the human readable text to a standard accepted font size based on the size of the barcode component Child The report prints to completion using the subreport components width as the page width and stretching over several pages until printing is complete DirectDraw Indicate the image will be sent directly to the printer or to an intermediate bitmap and then copied to the printer Fixed A single page prints based on the dimensions and position of the subreport component MaintainAspectRatio Maintain image original width to height ratio NewPrintJob Determine whether a new print job is started when the subreport is sent to the printer GraphicType Indicate the kind of the graphic object B
344. tions written in for example PL Tcl or PL pgSQL e internal functions e C language functions Every kind of function can take base types composite types or combinations of these as arguments parameters In addition every kind of function can return a base type or a composite type Many kinds of functions can take or return certain pSeudo types such as polymorphic types but the available facilities vary Click a to open an object list for Function To install the pldbgapi extension for debugging PL pgSQL functions you can right click anywhere in the Object List pane and choose Install pldbgapi Extension Function Wizard f m 1 a a m Click the New Function from the object list toolbar The Function Wizard will pop up and it allows you to create a function easily You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new function 1 Define the parameter s of the function Set the parameter Mode Type Schema Type Name and Default Value under corresponding columns 2 Select the Schema and Return Type from the list Hint Once uncheck the Show wizard next time you can go to Options to enable it Definition Definition consists of a valid SQL procedure statement This can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT or it can be a compound statement written using BEGIN and END Compound statements can contain declarations loops and other control structure statements Hint To customize the view of the editor an
345. tom Change the Objects Distribution To distribute objects on the canvas select more than one object tables views notes labels images or shapes then right click and choose Distribute gt Horizontal Vertical Change Page Setup To change paper size orientation and margins choose File gt Page Setup Apply Auto Layout To automatically arrange objects on the canvas click Auto Layout from the toolbar To change the Auto Layout format simply choose Diagram gt Auto Layout with from the menu and set the following options Option Description Auto Diagram Dimension Choose the suitable diagram dimension automatically Auto Size Tables to Fit Resize the table to fit its content automatically Quality The quality of the auto layout output Object Distance The distance between the objects in the diagram Preview and Print Model To preview the pages before printing simply click the Print Preview button The model can be printed to the printer or to various file formats Print to a printer Choose File gt ia Print to send your diagram directly to the printer You can set the printer option in the pop up window 220 Print to a file PDF PNG SVG Choose File gt Print As gt PDF PNG SVG to create a PDF PNG SVG file of your diagram Reverse Engineering Reverse Engineering is one of the key features of Model This feature allows you to load already existing database structures to create new diagrams
346. transmitting private documents via the Internet To get a secure connection the first thing you need to do is to install OpenSSL Library and download Database Source Note Available only for MySQL PostgreSQL and MariaDB Support from PostgreSQL 8 4 or later MySQL and MariaDB Connections To provide authentication details enable Use Authentication and fill in the required information Client Key The SSL key file in PEM format to use for establishing a secure connection Client Certificate The SSL certificate file in PEM format to use for establishing a secure connection CA Certificate The path to a file in PEM format that contains a list of trusted SSL certificate authorities 30 Verify CA Certificate Name Check the server s Common Name value in the certificate that the server sends to the client Specified Cipher A list of permissible ciphers to use for SSL encryption PostgreSQL Connection Choose the SSL Mode require Only try an SSL connection verify ca Only try an SSL connection and verify that the server certificate is issued by a trusted CA verify full Only try an SSL connection verify that the server certificate is issued by a trusted CA and that the server hostname matches that in the certificate To provide authentication details enable Use Authentication and fill in the required information Client Key The path of the client private key Client Certificate The path of the client cer
347. ttes rulers and other tools that can be used to manipulate the canvas The canvas is the area that contains the report layout This is where we place the bands and components that will ultimately control the content of each page of the report File Edit View Report Help Data Design Preview R A B BOBEM N dame GB OB Gi Gh Arial 12 B Ss Group Header 0 CustNo_2 Group Header 1 OrderNo_2 o Detail Group Footer 1 OrderNo_2 0 NoDataBehaviors ndBlan Generation Group Footer 0 CustNo_2 oS s B Footer gt Data Layout Width 0 Height 0 Report Wizard The Report Wizard is one of the many parts of ReportBuilder that reflects a level of professionalism and attention to detail found in no other reporting product If you or your end users have utilized standard Windows wizards in other products then you will be able to quickly recognize and use the ReportBuilder Report Wizard The Report Wizard can be accessed via the File gt New menu option of the Design tab A series of screens are presented each requesting information about the report When the last page is reached either a preview or design option can be selected When the Finish button is clicked it causes a report to be created and displayed as requested 1 Select the data pipeline and fields Select common fields for grouping Select the report layout and orientation Select the style oe o N Select Design o
348. ull SQL statements you selected Queries for Modification Check to Execute al DROP TABLE sakila city E A C DROP TABLE sakila countr opy Wi ALTER TABLE sakila custot ddress CI ALTER TABLE sakila staff neck Selected C ALTER TABLE sakila store Uncheck Selected Check All x Uncheck All Checked Scripts Detail Click Run Query button to execute the selected query 225 Model Conversion You can convert your models from one database type to another database type e g MariaDB 10 0 physical model to PostgreSQL 9 0 physical model During the conversion all data types are converted automatically The conversion process does not change the SQL syntax of views if converting from one database type to another If the target database version is MySQL 4 0 or below all views will be removed To convert an opened model file choose File gt Model Conversion Then select the target Database and Version Model Hints and Tips Navicat provides some useful hints to work on the model more effectively Action Description Locate Object in the Object selected in the Explorer s Diagram tab will be highlighted in the Diagram Canvas Diagram Canvas Double click an object in the Explorer s Diagram tab will jump to the corresponding object in the Diagram Canvas Delete Object from Select an object in the Diagram Canvas and press SHIFT DELETE me ar Sanane aT ORE
349. unction used to perform the conversion The function name may be schema qualified If it is not the function will be looked up in the path The function must have the following signature conv_proc integer source encoding ID integer destination encoding ID cstring source string null terminated C string internal destination fill with a null terminated C string integer source string length RETURNS void Default Check this box to indicate that this conversion is the default for this particular source to destination encoding There should be only one default encoding in a schema for the encoding pair PostgreSQL Domains A domain is essentially a data type with optional constraints restrictions on the allowed set of values The user who defines a domain becomes its owner Domains are useful for abstracting common constraints on fields into a single location for maintenance For example several tables might contain email address columns all requiring the same CHECK constraint to verify the address syntax Define a domain rather than setting up each table s constraint individually Click ae gt Domain to open an object list for Domain General Properties Underlying Type Category Choose the underlying data type category Base Type Composite Type Enum Type and Domain Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 2 or later Underlying Type Schema Select schema of the underlying data type Underlying Type Se
350. uniquely defines a record None of the fields that are part of the primary key can contain a null value Field s Properties Note The following options depend on the field type you are chosen Default To set the default value for the field Collation To specify the text collating function to use when comparing text entries for the column BINARY Compare string data using memcmp regardless of text encoding NOCASE The same as binary except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower case equivalents before the comparison is performed Note that only ASCII characters are case folded SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the size of the tables required RTRIM The same as binary except that trailing soace characters are ignored Note Support in SQLite 3 Not null ON CONFLICT To specify an algorithm used to resolve constraint conflicts if Not null option is checked ROLLBACK When a constraint violation occurs an immediate ROLLBACK occurs thus ending the current transaction and the command aborts with a return code of SQLITE_ CONSTRAINT If no transaction is active other than the implied transaction that is created on every command then this algorithm works the same as ABORT ABORT When a constraint violation occurs the command backs out any prior changes it might have made and aborts with a return code of SQLITE_ CONSTRAINT But no ROLLBACK is executed so changes from prior c
351. upport from PostgreSQL 9 2 or later Predicate Specify an exclusion constraint on a subset of the table 100 Deferrable The exclude constraint can be deferred Deferred The exclude constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction Comment Define the comment for the exclude PostgreSQL Table Rules The PostgreSQL rule system allows one to define an alternate action to be performed on insertions updates or deletions in database tables Roughly speaking a rule causes additional commands to be executed when a given command on a given table is executed Note You must be the owner of a table to create or change rules for it In the Rules tab just simply click a rule field for editing By using the rule toolbar you can create new edit and delete the selected rule field Add Rule Add a rule to the table Delete Rule Delete the selected rule Use the Name edit box to set the rule name This must be distinct from the name of any other rule for the same table Multiple rules on the same table and same event type are applied in alphabetical name order Event The event is one of SELECT INSERT UPDATE or DELETE Do instead This indicates that the commands should be executed instead of the original command Otherwise the commands should be executed in addition to the original command Condition Any SQL conditional expression returning boolean The condition expression may not refer to any tables excep
352. ust take a single argument of type state_data_type The return data type of the aggregate is defined as the return type of this function If final function is not specified then the ending state value is used as the aggregate s result and the return type is state_data_type Initial condition The initial setting for the state value This must be a string constant in the form accepted for the data type state_data_type If not specified the state value starts out null Sort operator schema and Sort operator The associated sort operator for a MIN or MAX like aggregate The operator is assumed to have the same input data types as the aggregate which must be a single argument aggregate Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 1 or later PostgreSQL Conversions Conversion defines a new conversion between character set encodings Conversion names may be used in the convert function to specify a particular encoding conversion Also conversions that are marked DEFAULT can be used for automatic encoding conversion between client and server For this purpose two conversions from encoding A to B and from encoding B to A must be defined Click aS gt Conversion to open an object list for Conversion Properties Owner The owner of the conversion function Note Support from PostgreSQL 8 0 or later 113 Source encoding The source encoding name Target encoding The destination encoding name Schema of function and Function The f
353. verse engineer disassemble or decompilation the Oracle Instant Client and duplicate the Programs except for a sufficient number of copies of each Program for your licensed use and one copy of each Program media discontinue use and destroy or return to all copies of the Oracle Instant Client and documentation after termination of the Agreement not pubish any results of benchmark tests run on the Programs comply fully with all relevant export laws and regulations of the United States and other applicable export and import laws to assure that neither the Oracle Instant Client nor any direct product thereof are exported directly or indirectly in violation of applicable laws allow PremiumSoft to audit your use of the Oracle Instant Client 4 Upgrades If this copy of the Software is an upgrade from an earlier version of the Software it is provided to you on a license exchange basis You agree by your installation and use of such copy of the Software to voluntarily terminate your earlier EULA and that you will not continue to use the earlier version of the Software or transfer it to another person or entity unless such transfer is pursuant to Section 3 5 Ownership The foregoing license gives you limited license to use the Software PremiumSoft and its suppliers retain all rights title and interest including all copyright and intellectual property rights in and to the Software as an independent work and as an underlying work serving as
354. w records and editing old records in a table To add a record 1 Make sure that your cursor is situated in the first blank cell on the table then enter the desired data If you are adding the new record into an existing table just simply click on an existing record and click the from the navigation bar or press CTRL N to get a blank display for a record 2 Watch the graphics symbol in the record selectors box just to the left of your record It will change from the a which indicates that it is the current record to L which indicates that you are editing this record 3 Just simply move to another record to save the record or click the from the navigation bar To edit a record 1 Select the record that you wish to edit by clicking in the specific field you want to change 2 Type in the new data for that field 3 Just simply move to another record the new data will overwrite the previous data or click the from the navigation bar Note Close the table is another way to save the records To edit multiple cells with same data 1 Select a block of cells in the data grid 2 Type in the new data Note Changes will apply to multiple fields with compatible data type To delete a record 1 Select the record that you wish to delete 2 Just simply right click and select Delete Record or click the from the navigation bar Edit Records with Special Handling To set Empty String for the cell right click the selected cell an
355. wed to save filter criteria to and load them from the profiles for future use Just simply right click on the Filter Wizard and select Open Profile Save Profile Save As or Delete Profile 199 Query A query is used to extract data from the database in a readable format according to the user s request Navicat provides two powerful tools for working with the SQL queries Query Editor for editing the query text directly and Query Builder for building queries visually You can save your queries for setting schedule Click fi to open an object list for Query Or you can simply click h button in the main window to open the Query Builder or the Query Editor To open a query using an external editor right click it and choose Open with External Editor You can set the file path of an external editor in Options Hint Queries sql are saved under the Settings Location To open the folder right click the query and choose Open Containing Folder If the connection is synchronized to Navicat Cloud queries are stored in the Cloud Button scription o Execute the query Run Run Selected or Run a statement from here E Stop Stop the query ES Explain Show the Query Plan of the query Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor Export Result Export the result of the query Query Builder Available only in Full Version Navicat provides a useful tool called Query Builder for building queries visually
356. xpression is only available when finding Structure a Check the Case Insensitive box to disable case sensitive search if necessary When finding Structure you can choose to search different objects Tables Views Functions Queries Indexes Triggers Events and or Materialized Views 7 Click the Find button and then double click an object in the Find Results list to view the record or the Structure Search Filter Navicat provides search filters for searching your objects in the Connection pane the Object List pane the Model Designer window and other tree structures In the Connection pane or other tree structures click on the pane or the tree to focus and enter a filter string directly If connections have opened in the Connection pane the filter will also apply to their database objects In the Object List pane click inthe Navicat main window and enter a filter string in the Search box In the Model Designer window simply enter a filter string in the Search box You can remove the filter by deleting the filter string 292 File View Favorites Tools Window Help A 0G amp a Connection User Table View Function Others SQLServer Backup Report 4 Navicat Cloud eE a Project MH 0015 E Open Table F Design Table E9 New Table T Delete Table 4 F Production Servers TRE Rows Modified Date 4 Pay Production Server 02 FES EmployeeDepartmentHistory 296 2010 10 18 13 53 15 4 AdventureWorks Adventure
357. xt to the checkbox and choose a table column You can choose Additional Filter from the list to enter the condition manually 3 Click on the operator box next to the column box and choose a filter operator ite Opes Rese My Field LIKE your_value contains case insensitive lt gt Note Available only for PostgreSQL does not contain lt gt does not contain case insensitive lt gt Note Available only for PostgreSQL My_ Field ILIKE your_value My_Field NOT LIKE your_value My_Field NOT ILIKE your_value My Field LIKE your_value My_Field gt your_value1 AND My Field lt 198 Fie is not between lt gt lt gt NOT My_Field gt your_value1 AND My_ Field lt your_value2 is in list lt gt My_Field IN aaa bbb is not in list lt gt My_Field NOT IN aaa bbb 4 Click on the criteria values box next to the operator box to activate the appropriate editor and enter the criteria values The editor used in criteria values box is determined by the editor type assigned to the corresponding column Click on the logical operator box next to the criteria values box and choose and or or Repeat step 1 5 to add another new condition 7 Click lt Apply Ctrl R gt or press CTRL R to see the result of the filtering you made Hint To set compound filter simply right click on a selected condition and choose Indent or Outdent You are allo
358. y manage the permissions in your databases SQL Server provides several roles which are security principals that group other principals Database level roles are database wide in their permissions scope Windows level principals e Windows Domain Login e Windows Local Login SQL Server level principal e SQL Server Login Database level principals e Database User e Database Role e Application Role Login SQL Server uses two ways to validate connections to SQL Server databases Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication SQL Server Authentication uses login records to validate the connection A Login object exposes a SQL Server login record Server Role Server level roles are also named fixed server roles because you cannot create new server level roles and the permissions of fixed server roles cannot be changed You can add SQL Server logins Windows accounts and Windows groups into server level roles Each member of a fixed server role can add other logins to that same role Database User To gain access to a database a login must be identified as a database user The database user is usually known by the same name as the login but you can create a database user for a login with a different name Database Role Fixed database roles are defined at the database level and exist in each database You can add any database account and other SQL Server roles into database level roles Each member of a fixed database r
359. you to use encryption Advanced Database Properties for MySQL PostgreSQL and MariaDB Set the advanced database properties which are not obligatory To start working with advanced database settings check the Use Advanced Connections The detailed description is given below To show the selected databases in the close state in the Connection pane click the preferable databases in the Databases list box The check box will show as 29 To show the selected databases in the open state in the Connection pane double click the preferable databases in the Databases list box The check box will show as To add a hidden database 1 Click Add DB to List button 2 Enter the database name 3 Select the newly added database in the Databases list box To remove a database select the database in the Databases list box and click Remove DB from List button Note The database will be just removed from the Databases list box it will still exist in the server Advanced Database Properties for SQLite You can click Attach Database button to attach a database file Option Description Database File Set the file path for a database Database Name Enter the database name which displays in Navicat Encrypted Enable this option and provide Password when connecting to an encrypted SQLite database To detach a database select it from the list and click Detach Database button SSL Settings Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a protocol for
360. zard will pop up and it allows you to create a procedure function easily You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new procedure function 1 Specify the Name of the routine and select the type of the routine Procedure or Function 2 Define the parameter s of the procedure function Set the parameter Name Type Mode and Default Value under corresponding columns 3 If you create a function select the Return Type from the list Hint Once uncheck the Show wizard next time you can go to Options to enable it Definition The Code Outline window displays information about the function procedure including parameter code body etc To show the Code Outline window simply choose View gt Code Outline 70 Note Available only in Full Version ewon osen SSS Retesntecodecuting O o o O show te deal vew ote coson Expand the selected item io Collapse the selected item sl Toggle sorting by position Hint To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing see Editor Advanced Features Result To run the procedure function click Run on the toolbar If the SQL statement is correct the statement will be executed and if the statement is supposed to return data the DBMS Output tab opens with the data returned by the procedure function If an error occurs while executing the procedure function execution stops the appropriate error message is displayed If the function procedure

Table of Contents

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents